<ruby id="zx91x"></ruby><p id="zx91x"></p>
<p id="zx91x"></p>
<pre id="zx91x"><ruby id="zx91x"><mark id="zx91x"></mark></ruby></pre>

<p id="zx91x"><del id="zx91x"></del></p>

        <track id="zx91x"><ruby id="zx91x"></ruby></track>

            <pre id="zx91x"><ruby id="zx91x"></ruby></pre>

            <track id="zx91x"><del id="zx91x"></del></track>

              <big id="zx91x"><ruby id="zx91x"></ruby></big>

                  大學英語三級試題及答案15篇

                  時間:2022-07-12 寫作知識 點擊:

                  大學英語三級試題及答案15篇

                  大學英語三級試題及答案(1)

                  大學英語三級全真模擬聽力試題(一)

                  Test One

                  Part I: Listening Comprehension (15%)

                  Section A

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear 10 short conversations. At the end of each conversation, a question will be asked about what was said. Both the conversation and the question will be spoken only once. After each question there will be a pause. During the pause, you must choose the best answer from the four choices marked A), B), C) and D. Then mark the corresponding letter on the Answer Sheet with a single line through the center.

                  Example: You will hear: Where do you think the conversation most provably took place?

                  You will read:

                  A) At the office.

                  B) In the waiting room.

                  C) At the airport.

                  D) In a restaurant.

                  From the conversation we know that the two were talking about some work they had to finish in the evening. This is most likely to have taken place at the office. Therefore, A) “At the office” is the best answer. You should choose [A] on the Answer Sheet and mark it with a single line through the center.

                  Sample Answer [A] [B] [C] [D]

                  1. A) Fixing an engine. B) Repairing a car.

                  C) Cashing a check. D) Buying some wheels.

                  2. A) Visit Japan. B) Cook some food.

                  C) Travel abroad. D) Eat out.

                  3. A) One of a cheaper price. B) One of a different color.

                  C) One of a fashionable style. D) One of a smaller size.

                  4. A) He has changed his plan. B) He has canceled his trip.

                  C) He is arriving this afternoon. D) He forgot to arrange his trip.

                  5. A) They had lost their way. B) They were told it would rain.

                  C) They were caught in the rain. D) They had taken an umbrella.

                  6. A) They will take the bus at 11 o’clock.

                  B) The bus is late.

                  C) The bus has already arrived.

                  D) The woman thought the bus would arrive at 11:20.

                  7. A) The man shouldn’t drink either.

                  B) Drinking is better than smoking.

                  C) The man should switch to drinking.

                  D) The man could smoke a little.

                  8. A) In a bookstore.

                  B) At a museum

                  C) At a zoo.

                  D) On a college campus.

                  9. A) Teacher and student.

                  B) Shop assistant and customer.

                  C) Tourist and travel agent.

                  D) Husband and wife.

                  10. A) She will stop to take a rest.

                  B) She will work for three hours.

                  C) She will have her back checked.

                  D) She will buy a computer in three hours.

                  Section B

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear a short passage. At the end of the passage, you will hear two questions. Both the passage and the questions will be spoken twice. After you hear a question, you must choose the best answer from the four choices marked A),B),C) and D. Then mark the corresponding letter on the Answer Sheet with a single line through the center.

                  Questions 11 to 12 are based on the passage you have just heard.

                  11. A. There are only 23 hours in a day

                  B. There are 8 days in a week

                  C. There are one more hour in a day

                  D. All of the above

                  12. A. Set one hour ahead in each new time zone.

                  B. Set one hour ahead for the whole trip.

                  C. Set one full day back for the whole trip.

                  D. Set 12 hours back.

                  Section C

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear a passage three times. Listen during the first reading. Then listen to carefully the passage again. When it is being read the second time, you should fill in the six blanks numbered form S1 to S6 with the exact words or phrases you have just heard. Finally, when the passage is read for the third time, you should check what you have written.

                  Information has always been at the center of human communication. You may ask why. Well, communication between people involves giving and receiving information. The way we give and receive information today has S1____________ a revolution in the development of the mass media in the 20th century.

                  The first truly mass communication medium was the newspaper. For the first time in history, people could read about S2____________ in their country and from around the world every day. However, there were two problems with newspapers of that time. S3____________, newspapers were available only in large cities, for getting newspapers to the countryside was a difficult and time-consuming task. Secondly, newspapers weren"t always S4____________, as there was a limited range of opinions.

                  Nowadays, we can S5____________ from a wide variety of sources to get information. Television and the Internet have given us the chance to be informed about everything the S6_____________ it happens. Numerous radio and TV stations, satellite channels and millions of websites help people keep up with the latest news. People live history and are part of it.

                  大學英語三級全真模擬聽力試題(二)

                  Test Two

                  Section A

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear 10 short conversations. At the end of each conversation, a question will be asked about what was said. Both the conversation and the question will be spoken only once. After each question there will be a pause. During the pause, you must choose the best answer from the four choices marked A), B), C) and D. Then mark the corresponding letter on the Answer Sheet with a single line through the center.

                  Example: You will hear: Where do you think the conversation most provably took place?

                  You will read:

                  A) At the office.

                  B) In the waiting room.

                  C) At the airport.

                  D) In a restaurant.

                  From the conversation we know that the two were talking about some work they had to finish in the evening. This is most likely to have taken place at the office. Therefore, A) “At the office” is the best answer. You should choose [A] on the Answer Sheet and mark it with a single line through the center.

                  Sample Answer [A] [B] [C] [D]

                  1. A) Carol. B) Jim.

                  C) Paul. D) The woman.

                  2. A) 11:00. B) 11:30.

                  C) 12:00. D) 12:30.

                  3. A) 5. B) 12.

                  C) 14. D) 16.

                  4. A) Go to the post office. B) Go down the street.

                  C) Cross the street. D) Go to the cinema.

                  5. A) Denis. B) John.

                  C) Mary. D) The woman.

                  6. A)To get more advice. B)To get more exercise.

                  C)To get married. D)To get a job.

                  7. A) Mr. Johnson will be busy tomorrow morning.

                  B) Mr. Johnson will be busy tomorrow.

                  C).Tomorrow afternoon will be fine.

                  D) The man can meet Mr. Johnson the day after tomorrow.

                  8. A) A dentist. B) Her teacher.

                  C) Her brother. D) Her friends.

                  9. A) He’s a receptionist. B) He’s a tour guide.

                  C) He’s a shopkeeper. D) He’s an accountant.

                  10. A) At a theater. B) In a waiting room.

                  C) In a supermarket. D) In a restaurant.

                  Section B

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear a short passage. At the end of the passage, you will hear two questions. Both the passage and the questions will be spoken twice. After you hear a question, you must choose the best answer from the four choices marked A),B),C) and D. Then mark the corresponding letter on the Answer Sheet with a single line through the center.

                  Questions 11 to 12 are based on the passage you have just heard.

                  11. A) Teachers made children sit still for a long time.

                  B) Children must learn and discover things themselves.

                  C) Children had to repeat things till they could remember them.

                  D) School is like a prison to some children.

                  12. A) They haven’t learnt anything in school.

                  B) Their teachers don’t allow them to work.

                  C) Their parents don’t allow them to work

                  D) The law does not allow them to work.

                  Section C

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear a passage three times. Listen during the first reading. Then listen to carefully the passage again. When it is being read the second time, you should fill in the six blanks numbered form S1 to S6 with the exact words or phrases you have just heard. Finally, when the passage is read for the third time, you should check what you have written.

                  One way to think about time is to imagine a world without time. There could be no movement, because time and movement cannot be S1____________. A world without time could exist only as long as there were no changes. For time and change are linked. We know that time has passed when something changes.

                  In the real world -- the world with time -- changes never stop. Some changes happen only once in a S2____________; others happen repeatedly. Humans always have noted S3____________ events that repeat themselves. When people began to count such events, they began to measure time.

                  In early human history, the only changes that seemed to repeat themselves evenly were the movements of S4____________ in the sky. The most easily seen result of these movements was the difference between light and darkness.

                  The sun rises in the eastern sky, S5____________ light. It moves across the sky and sinks in the west, causing darkness. The appearance and disappearance of the sun was even and unfailing. The periods of light and darkness it created were the first S6____________ periods of time. We have named each period of light and darkness -- one day.

                  大學英語三級全真模擬聽力試題(三)

                  Test Three

                  Section A

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear 10 short conversations. At the end of each conversation, a question will be asked about what was said. Both the conversation and the question will be spoken only once. After each question there will be a pause. During the pause, you must choose the best answer from the four choices marked A), B), C) and D. Then mark the corresponding letter on the Answer Sheet with a single line through the center.

                  Example: You will hear: Where do you think the conversation most provably took place?

                  You will read:

                  A) At the office.

                  B) In the waiting room.

                  C) At the airport.

                  D) In a restaurant.

                  From the conversation we know that the two were talking about some work they had to finish in the evening. This is most likely to have taken place at the office. Therefore, A) “At the office” is the best answer. You should choose [A] on the Answer Sheet and mark it with a single line through the center.

                  Sample Answer [A] [B] [C] [D]

                  1. A) A policewoman.

                  B) A hotel clerk.

                  C) A waitperson.

                  D) A shop assistant.

                  2. A) The lady bought the desk lamp when she was in Hong Kong.

                  B) The lady bought the desk lamp in China last winter.

                  C) The lady’s friend got it on the Internet for her.

                  D) The lady’s friend bought it in China.

                  3. A) He didn’t attend the lecture.

                  B) He fell asleep on the train.

                  C) He caught the early train to attend the lecture.

                  D) The train broke down and he was late for the lecture.

                  4. A) 08:00.

                  B) 08:15.

                  C) 08:30.

                  D) 08:50.

                  5. A) His car key.

                  B) His overcoat

                  C) The sofa.

                  D) The table.

                  6. A) The man can’t swim.

                  B) The man can swim after he has done his homework.

                  C) The man can’t swim because he doesn’t know the way.

                  D) The man can swim if he knows the way.

                  7. A) She does not work on rainy days.

                  B) She goes to work by bicycle every day.

                  C) She walks to work on rainy days.

                  D) She always goes to work on foot.

                  8. A) In a barbershop.

                  B) In a supermarket.

                  C) In a bank.

                  D) In a restaurant.

                  9. A) Husband and wife.

                  B) Doctor and patient.

                  C) Neighbors.

                  D) Employer and employee.

                  10. A) She planted trees.

                  B) She saw the panda.

                  C) She taught her roommates how to play Chinese chess.

                  D) She learned to play Chinese chess.

                  Section B

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear a short passage. At the end of the passage, you will hear two questions. Both the passage and the questions will be spoken twice. After you hear a question, you must choose the best answer from the four choices marked A),B),C) and D. Then mark the corresponding letter on the Answer Sheet with a single line through the center.

                  Questions 11 to 12 are based on the passage you have just heard.

                  11. A) You must tell your new friend your telephone number at your first meeting.

                  B) You shouldn’t talk about business on your first meeting with your new friend.

                  C) It’s quite common to give information about your family or your work.

                  D)You don’t have the right to end the conversation.

                  12. A) How to make new friends

                  B) The three parts of the first conversation with a new friend.

                  C) The importance of talking with a stranger in English

                  D) How to maintain friendship

                  Section C

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear a passage three times. Listen during the first reading. Then listen to carefully the passage again. When it is being read the second time, you should fill in the six blanks numbered form S1 to S6 with the exact words or phrases you have just heard. Finally, when the passage is read for the third time, you should check what you have written.

                  Dreams are expressions of thoughts, feelings and events that pass through our mind while we are sleeping. People dream about one to two hours each night. We may have four to seven dreams in one night. Everybody dreams. But only some people S1____________ their dreams.

                  The word "dream" comes from an old word in English that means "S2____________" and "music." Our dreams often include all the senses – smells, sounds, S3____________ , tastes and things we touch. We dream in S4____________. Sometimes we dream the same dream over and over again. These repeated dreams are often unpleasant. They may even be nightmares -- bad dreams that S5____________ us.

                  Artists, writers and scientists sometimes say they get ideas from dreams. For example, the singer Paul McCartney of the Beatles said he awakened one day with the music for the song "Yesterday" in his head. The writer Mary Shelley said she had a very strong dream about a scientist using a machine to make a S6____________ come alive. When she awakened, she began to write her book about a scientist named Frankenstein who creates a frightening monster.

                  大學英語三級全真模擬聽力試題(四)

                  Test Four

                  Section A

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear 10 short conversations. At the end of each conversation, a question will be asked about what was said. Both the conversation and the question will be spoken only once. After each question there will be a pause. During the pause, you must choose the best answer from the four choices marked A), B), C) and D.. Then mark the corresponding letter on the Answer Sheet with a single line through the center.

                  Example: You will hear: Where do you think the conversation most provably took place?

                  You will read:

                  A) At the office.

                  B) In the waiting room.

                  C) At the airport.

                  D) In a restaurant.

                  From the conversation we know that the two were talking about some work they had to finish in the evening. This is most likely to have taken place at the office. Therefore, A) “At the office” is the best answer. You should choose [A] on the Answer Sheet and mark it with a single line through the center.

                  Sample Answer [A] [B] [C] [D]

                  1. A) Turn the PC off. B) Leave the house.

                  C) Play badminton. D) Finish his computer program.

                  2. A) Ping Pong balls. B) Golf balls.

                  C) Basketballs. D) Footballs.

                  3. A) Eating out. B) Buying birthday presents.

                  C) Changing clothes. D) Having a rest.

                  4. A) She wants to have a break. B) She wants to take some time off.

                  C) She wants to leave on time. D) She wants to continue.

                  5. A) He couldn’t see the performance clearly. B) He thought the performance was dull.

                  C) He found the clock didn’t tell the right time. D) He didn’t arrive in time for the

                  performance.

                  6. A) $47. B) $37.

                  C) $26. D) $11.

                  7. A) Teacher and student. B) Doctor and patient.

                  C) Mother and son. D) Husband and wife.

                  8. A) She is seldom absent. B) She is regularly absent.

                  C) She misses her school days. D) She doesn’t like school at all.

                  9. A) It’s warm. B) It’s cold.

                  C) It’s sunny. D) It’s cloudy.

                  10. A) It’s usually hard to borrow David’s car.

                  B) David is often willing to lend money to others.

                  C) David is willing to lend anything except his car to others.

                  D) When someone borrows David’s car, they should pay him.

                  Section B

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear a short passage. At the end of the passage, you will hear two questions. Both the passage and the questions will be spoken twice. After you hear a question, you must choose the best answer from the four choices marked A),B),C) and D. Then mark the corresponding letter on the Answer Sheet with a single line through the center.

                  Questions 11 to 12 are based on the passage you have just heard.

                  11. A) She didn’t have enough money.

                  B) She wanted to thank the doctor.

                  C) She thought that a purse was a better present than money.

                  D) Her son asked her to do that.

                  12. A) 5 pounds.

                  B) 50 pounds.

                  C) 250 pounds.

                  D) 500 pounds.

                  Section C

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear a passage three times. Listen during the first reading. Then listen to carefully the passage again. When it is being read the second time, you should fill in the six blanks numbered form S1 to S6 with the exact words or phrases you have just heard. Finally, when the passage is read for the third time, you should check what you have written.

                  What would happen if you were the only person left who spoke your language? Who would you share stories with, sing songs to, or S1____________ jokes with? Who would understand your names for local plants, animals and traditions? This is the example David Harrison and Gregory Anderson use to explain the situation of many people around the world whose local languages are disappearing Mr. Harrison and Mr. Anderson head Living Tongues, an organization that studies and S2____________ endangered languages.

                  Sometimes a language disappears S3____________ when the last person speaking it dies. Or, a local language might disappear more slowly. This happens when an official language is used more often and children stop learning the local language of their parents. This is not a new S4____________. Official languages often represent a form of control over a group of people.

                  Throughout history, the language spoken by a powerful group S5____________ across a civilization. The more powerful culture S6____________ respects the language and culture of smaller ethnic groups. So, smaller cultures lose their local language as the language of the culture in power becomes the stronger influence.

                  大學英語三級全真模擬聽力試題(五)

                  Test Five

                  Section A

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear 10 short conversations. At the end of each conversation, a question will be asked about what was said. Both the conversation and the question will be spoken only once. After each question there will be a pause. During the pause, you must choose the best answer from the four choices marked A), B), C) and D. Then mark the corresponding letter on the Answer Sheet with a single line through the center.

                  Example: You will hear: Where do you think the conversation most provably took place?

                  You will read:

                  A) At the office.

                  B) In the waiting room.

                  C) At the airport.

                  D) In a restaurant.

                  From the conversation we know that the two were talking about some work they had to finish in the evening. This is most likely to have taken place at the office. Therefore, A) “At the office” is the best answer. You should choose [A] on the Answer Sheet and mark it with a single line through the center.

                  Sample Answer [A] [B] [C] [D]

                  1. A) 15. B) 25.

                  C) 35. D) 45.

                  2. A) The man can handle the task by himself.

                  B) The woman reminds the man not to forget to ask Linda.

                  C) Linda will probably refuse to help the man.

                  D) The woman is quite willing to help the man.

                  3. A) On a train. B) On a bus.

                  C) On a plane. D) In a car.

                  4. A) It was a short but very good speech. B) It was a long but humorous speech.

                  C) It was too short. D) It was too long.

                  5. A) His biscuits. B) His desk.

                  C) The drawer. D) His pen.

                  6. A) Monday. B) Tuesday.

                  C) Wednesday. D) Thursday.

                  7. A) Flower. B) Water.

                  C) Sugar. D) Butter.

                  8 A) The man’s lawyer. B) The man’s wife.

                  C) The man’s teacher. D) The man’s boss.

                  9. A) She did not have enough money for the trip. B) She did not have enough time for the trip

                  C) She did not enjoy the trip. D) She hopes to take another trip soon.

                  10. A) Employer and employee. B) Mother and son.

                  C) Friends. D) Teacher and student.

                  Section B

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear a short passage. At the end of the passage, you will hear two questions. Both the passage and the questions will be spoken twice. After you hear a question, you must choose the best answer from the four choices marked A),B),C) and D. Then mark the corresponding letter on the Answer Sheet with a single line through the center.

                  Questions 11 to 12 are based on the passage you have just heard.

                  11. A) People only care about their own business

                  B) People are always ready to help each other

                  C) People live in very small areas

                  D) People give help to others in order to get something in return.

                  12. A) Life in cities and life in villages in the same country are almost the same.

                  B) There are not many people in the streets in the center of London on Sundays.

                  C) In large cities people seldom know what their neighbors have for lunch.

                  D)In an English village everybody knows everybody else.

                  Section C

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear a passage three times. Listen during the first reading. Then listen to carefully the passage again. When it is being read the second time, you should fill in the six blanks numbered form S1 to S6 with the exact words or phrases you have just heard. Finally, when the passage is read for the third time, you should check what you have written.

                  An estimated nine million people rock climb in the United States. Millions more take part in the activity around the world. Some do it just for S1____________satisfaction. Others S2____________. Rock climbing can be dangerous. But there are many methods and protective devices that can increase a climber"s safety.

                  Climbing takes strength, control and good S3____________. Climbers have to pull themselves S4____________ up the face of very high rocks or walls. So they have to be strong enough to carry their own weight. And climbers sometimes have to hold on to rocks by only their fingers or toes.

                  There are several kinds of rock climbing. Traditional rock climbing is done outside. Climbers wear ropes and attach devices to the rocks as they climb many hundreds of meters up. They also connect their ropes to the devices. If a climber slips, a rope can stop him from S5____________.

                  Sport climbing is similar. However, in those cases the protective devices are permanently placed in the rock. There is also S6____________ climbing. Rock walls made of wood or concrete have places for the climber"s hands and feet.

                  答案:

                  BDBAC BACDA DA experienced events Firstly reliable choose minute

                  CADAC BBADD BD separated while natural objects producing accepted

                  BCABA ACDAC CB remember joy sights color frighten creature

                  ABADB CCABA BC exchange protects immediately process spreads rarely

                  ACCBD AABCD BA personal compete balance straight falling indoor

                  大學英語三級試題及答案(2)

                  Test 4

                  Part I Listening Comprehension (15%)

                  Part II. Vocabulary and Structure (20%)

                  Directions: There are 20incompleete sentences in this part. For each sentence there are four choices marked A), B), C), D).Choose the ONE that best completes the sentence. Then mark the corresponding letter on the Answer Sheet with a single line through the center.

                  13. _______ a hot day, I decided to go for a swim.

                  A) What B) Being C) Having been D) It being

                  14. _______ the work, he would do it some other way.

                  A) Was he doing B) If he does

                  C) Were he to do D) everyone

                  15. Without careful investigation, _______ of us is liable to come to wrong conclusions.

                  A) any one B) anyone C) every one D) everyone

                  16. The director was satisfied _______ the way we were doing the work.

                  A) at B) in C) of D) with

                  17. Ina sudden ________ of anger, the man tore up everything within reach.

                  A) attack B) burst C) broke D) blast

                  18. In Britain people _______ four million tons of potatoes every year.

                  A) swallow B) dispose C) consume D) exhaust

                  19. Don’t do that again, _______?

                  A) shall you B) don’t you C) will you D) won’t you

                  20. Many of the human problems associated with living in the ocean are _______ the problems of living in outer space.

                  A) A) just as B) such that C) such as D) the same as

                  21. Pupils complain that there aren’t enough quality programs on TV _______ are shown for them.

                  A) what B) they C) that D) those

                  22. I’m very sorry to have _______ you with so many questions.

                  A) interfered B) offended C) impressed D) bothered

                  23. Our son doesn’t know what to ________ at the university; he can’t make up his mind about his future.

                  A) take in B) take up C) take over D) take after

                  24. Water pollution, together with old tins and other forms of garbage, _____ many problems in our large, industrial city today.

                  A) is causing B) have caused C) have been causing D) are causing

                  25. It was not until he had arrived home ______ he remembered his appointment with the lawyer.

                  A) that B) when C) then D)but

                  26. We had to _______ a lot of noise when the children were at home.

                  A) go in for B) hold onto C) put up with D) keep pace with

                  27. The car ______ halfway for no reason.

                  A) broke off B) broke down C) broke up D) broke out

                  28. The newcomers found it impossible to _______ themselves to the climate sufficiently to make permanent homes in the new country.

                  A) suit B) adapt C) regulate D) fit

                  29. The customer complained that the lamps had not been delivered yet, and ______.

                  A) the chairs too B) the chairs weren’t either

                  C) neither had the chairs D) neither the chairs had been

                  30. Thoroughly _______, the investigator hesitated to report what he had seen.

                  A) confusing B) confused C) being confused D) to be confused

                  31. When people become unemployed, it is ________ which is often worse than lake of wages.

                  A) laziness B) poverty C) idleness D) inability

                  32. A lorry _______ Jane’s cat and sped away.

                  A) ran over B) ran into C) ran through D) ran down

                  Part III. Reading Comprehension (40%)

                  Directions: There are four passages in this part. Each passage is followed by five questions or unfinished statements. For each question, there are four choices marked A B C and D. You should choose the best answer. Then mark the corresponding letter on the Answer Sheet with a single line through the center.

                  Passage One

                  Questions 33 to 37 are based on the following passage.

                  The Great Wall of China is considered to be the only man-made project seen from the moon. Although it was once thought to have been built entirely during the Qin Dynasty between 221 and 208 BC, it is now believed to have been started earlier.

                  The 15-foot-high, 25-foot-wide, 1, 500-mile-long structure was undoubtedly built to keep out invading enemies. To the common people of empire, who had been forced to build the wall, it was not worth it, however. The wall, and other public works completed by the Qin Dynasty, had caused great losses on the wealth and human life of the country. As a result, an angry population rose up in rebellion against the Qin Dynasty and in 207 BC the Han Dynasty began.

                  Because of its rich history and magnificent appearance, the Great Wall attracts tourists, scientists, and historians to this day and will continue to do so for generations.

                  33. According to the author of this passage, the Han Dynasty was able to come into power because_______.

                  A) enemies were not effectively prevented from invading the empire

                  B) it had started the work on the wall and really controlled it all along

                  C) the common people rebelled against the empire that had forced them to work on the Great Wall

                  D) the Qin emperor lost all his personal wealth in the creation of the Great Wall

                  34. The main idea of this passage is that ______.

                  A) the emperor of the Qin Dynasty was a slave driver

                  B) invading enemies were a problem in ancient China

                  C) the common people of ancient China were very poor

                  D) the human achievement of the Great Wall is widely appreciated

                  35. With which of the following opinions would this author most likely agree?

                  A) The pyramids of Egypt also attract modern man because of the human effort they represent.

                  B) The pyramids of Egypt would probably be seen to a human standing on the moon.

                  C) The human significance of the pyramids of Egypt is greater than that of the Great Wall.

                  D) The human significance of the pyramids of Egypt is not as great as that of the Great Wall.

                  36. The writer has not directly stated, but would support the opinion that ______.

                  A) astronauts have taken a personal interest in the history of the Great Wall of China

                  B) the common people of the Qin Dynasty were the ones who provided the labor in constructing the Great Wall

                  C) work on the Great Wall was started before the Qin Dynasty came into existence

                  D) the Great Wall of China is a great human achievement and was probably worth the effort it took

                  37. What was the main purpose for building the Great Wall?

                  A) To make the empire stronger B) To make people richer

                  C) To keep out invading enemies D) To make more money from people

                  Passage 2

                  Questions 38 to 42 are based on the following passage.

                  Why are Arabic figures used everywhere in the world? In the past, other counting figures once existed in many countries, but they all died away. The Roman figures, for instance, were popular in Europe before the 13th century. However they are hardly in use now, except on some clocks and watches, and on other rare occasions. Look at the following and you will know why it is so.

                  The Rome used seven letters, each standing for a different number, I for 1, V for 5, X for 10, L for 50, C for 100, D for 500, M for 1000. To express a small number the Romans would use repetition or additions, or subtractions. For instance, II means 2, XXX means 30 (repetition); VII means 7 (addition) and IV expresses 4(subtraction).

                  To express a number a thousand times larger, they put a line above the number. Thus, XVI=16000, and CDXLVII=447000. To show the year 1993 in Ramon figures, it will be “MCMXCIII.” The inconvenience is quite clear. Besides, it would be difficult to express in Roman figures a decimal point or a fraction.

                  The Arabic numbers, on the other hand, avoid all this trouble. First they are decimal. Second they are easy to write. It is these strong points that make the Arabic figures accepted by people all over the world.

                  38. The Roman figures were widely used____.

                  A) during Shakespeare’s time

                  B) in the United States

                  C) in the world

                  D) in Europe before the thirteenth century

                  39. The number LV means ________.

                  A) a thousand times B) 55000 C) 5500 D) more than five thousand

                  40. If we show the year 1548 in Roman figures, it will be _______.

                  A) MVMIVIII B) MDXLVIII C) MDMXXXXVIII D) MDLXVIII

                  41. Why are Arabic figures widely used in the world?

                  A) Other counting figures died away

                  B) Arabic figures are convenient and easy to express decimal point and fraction.

                  C) Arabic figures are decimal.

                  D) Both B and C.

                  42. What is the meaning of the word underlined in Para. 2?

                  A) Repetition B) Reduction C) Multiplication D) Division

                  Passage 3

                  Questions 43 to 47 are based on the following passage.

                  Brazil has become one of the developing countries which make great successes at reducing population growth-but more by accident than design. While countries such as India have made efforts to reduce birth rates(出生率), Brazil has had better result without really trying, says George Martine at Harvard.

                  Brazil’s population growth rate has dropped from 2.99% a year between 1951 and 1960 to 1.93% a year between 1981 and 1990, and Brazilian women now have only 2.7 children on average. Martine says this figure may have fallen still further since 1990, and achievement that makes it the envy of many other Third World countries.

                  Martine thinks that soap operas (肥皂劇) and installment plans introduced in the 1970s played an important, although indirect, role in lowering the birth rate. Brazil is one of the world’s biggest producers of soap operas, Globo, Brazil’s most popular television network, shows three hours of soaps six nights a week., while three others show at least one hour a night. Most soaps are based on wealthy characters living the high life in big cities.

                  “ Although they have never really tried to work in a message towards the problems of reproduction, they describe middle and upper class values – not many children, different attitudes towards sex, women working, ” says Martine, “They sent this image to all parts of Brazil and made people know other patterns and other values, which were put into a very attractive package.”

                  Meanwhile, the installment plans tried to encourage the poor to become consumers. “This led to a great change in consumption patters and consumption was incompatible with unlimited reproduction,” says Martine.

                  43. According to the passage, Brazil has cut back its population growth ________.

                  A) by educating its citizens B) by developing TV programs

                  C) by careful family planning D) by chance

                  44. According to the passage, many Third World countries ________.

                  A) haven’t given much attention to birth control

                  B) would soon join Brazil in controlling their birth rates

                  C) haven’t yet found an effective measure to control their population

                  D) haven’t produced enough TV plays

                  45. what does the world “ envy ” in Line 4, Para. 2 mean?

                  A) Love B) Hate C) Admiration D) Hope

                  46. Soap operas have helped in lowering Brazil’s birth rate because ________.

                  A) they have gradually changed people’s way of life

                  B) they keep people sitting long hours watching TV

                  C) people are interesting in soap operas

                  D) they popularize birth control measures

                  47. What is Martine’s conclusion about Brazil’s population growth?

                  A) The increase in birth rate will promote (促進) consumption

                  B) The desire for consumption helps to reduce birth rate

                  C) A country’s production is limited by its population.

                  D) Consumption patterns have nothing to do with population.

                  Passage 4

                  Questions 48 to 52 are based on the following passage.

                  Human wants seem endless. When a starving man gets a meal, he begins to think about an overcoat, when a manager gets a new sports car, reams of country clubs and pleasure boats dance into his view.

                  They many wants of mankind might be regarded as making up several levels. When there is money enough to satisfy one level of wants, another level appears.

                  The first and most basic level of wants is food. Once this want is satisfied, a second level of wants appears: clothing and housing. By the end of World War II these wants were satisfied for a great majority of Americans. Then a third level appeared. It included such items as cars and new houses.

                  By 1957 or 1958 this third level of wants was fairly well satisfied. Then, in the late 1950s a fourth level of wants appeared: the “life-enriching” level. While the other levels mean physical satisfaction--- the feeding, comfort, safety, and transportation of the human body---this level means mental needs for recognition, achievement and happiness. It includes a variety of goods and services, many of which could be called“luxury(奢侈)” items. Among them are vacation trips, the best medical care, and entertainment. Also included here are fancy foods and the latest styles in clothing.

                  On the fourth level, a greater percentage of consumers spending goes to services, while on the first three levels more is spent on goods. Will consumers raise their sights to a fifth level of wants as their income increases, or will they continue to demand luxuries and personal services on the fourth level?

                  A fifth level probably would be wants that can be achieved best by community(社區) action. Consumers may be spending more on taxes to pay for government action against disease, pollution and crime. After filling our stomachs, our garages, and our minds, we now may seek to ensure the health and safety to enjoy more fully the good things on the first four levels.

                  48. According to the passage, man will begin to think about such needs as housing and ________.

                  A) he was saved up enough money B) he was grown dissatisfied with his simple shelter

                  C) he was satisfied his hunger D) he was learned to build houses

                  49. It can be inferred from the passage that by the end of World War II most Americans_________.

                  A) were very rich B) were very poor

                  C) had the good things on the first three levels D) didn’t own cars

                  50. Which of the following is NOT related to physical satisfaction?

                  A) Seeing interesting films. B) A comfortable house.

                  C) Delicious food. D) A family cat.

                  51. What is the main want of man on the fourth level?

                  A) The more goods, the better. B) The more mental satisfaction, the better.

                  C) The more luxury items, the better. D) The more earning, the better.

                  52. The author thinks that a fifth level _______.

                  A) would be a little better than the fourth level

                  B) may be a lot more desirable than the first four

                  C) can be the last and most satisfying level

                  D) will come true provided the government takes actions

                  Part IV. Translations from English to Chinese. (15%)

                  Directions: In this part, there are four items which you should translate into Chinese, each item consisting of one sentence. These sentences are all come from Part III of the test paper. You can refer back to the passages so as to identify their meaning in the context. Write the translation on the Translation Sheet in Test Paper.

                  T1. (Lines 1-2, Para3, Passage1)

                  Because of its rich history and magnificent, the Great Wall attracts tourists, scientists, and historians to this day and will continue to do so for generations.

                  ______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________T2. (Lines 1-2, Para1, Passage2)

                  In the past, other counting figures once existed in many countries, but they all died away.

                  ______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

                  T3. (Lines 1-2, Para1, Passage3)

                  Brazil has become one of the developing countries which make great successes at reducing population growth- but more by accident than design.

                  ______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

                  T4. (Lines 1-2, Para1, Passage4)

                  Human wants seem endless. When a starving man gets a meal, he begins to think about an overcoat…

                  _______________________________________________________________________________

                  _______________________________________________________________________________

                  Part V. Writing (15%)

                  Directions: For this part, you are allowed 30 minutes to write a composition of no less than 100 words on Health and Wealth. Remember your composition must be written according to the following outline. Write your composition on the Composition Sheet.

                  Outline: 1. 財富和健康之間似乎存在矛盾;

                  2. 財富建立在健康之上,過度追逐財富失去健康;

                  3. 明智對待健康和財富。

                  Words for conference: opportunity energetic conflict at the cost of

                  Health and Wealth

                  _______________________________________________________________________________

                  _______________________________________________________________________________

                  ______________________________________________________________________________

                  _________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

                  Keys:

                  Part I.

                  Part II.

                  13-17: BCBDB 18-22: CCDCD

                  23-27: AAACB 28-32:   BCBCA

                  Part III.

                  33-37: CDADC 38-42: DBBDB

                  43-47: DCCAB   48-52: CDABD

                  Part IV.

                  T1:長城歷史悠久、雄偉壯觀,直到今天它還吸引著成千上萬的游客、科研工作者及歷史學家的目光,將來仍然吸引著人們的目光。

                  T2:過去,許多國家都有一些計算數字,但后來都消亡了。

                  T3:巴西是控制人口增長非常有效的發展中國家之一。

                  T4:人的需求是無止境的。當一個挨餓的人吃了飯以后,他就考慮要一件外套。

                  Part V

                  Health and Wealth

                  As the old saying goes: “Health is wealth”.(以引語開頭) People, especially wealthy people in poor health understand it well. Since there is a rule in reality---the wealthier you are, the weaker your health is. This seems to show that there is a conflict between wealth and health.(議題:財富和健康似乎存在對立關系)

                  It’s not exact. Wealth is based on health.(表明態度)。A student in good health can absorb knowledge more reality. Such a student would have more opportunities to have a better –paid job. Being in good health, a business man is more energetic and can achieve more success. The conflict exists only if one devotes too much energy to study or work. In this case, he loses his health.

                  So, what we should do in our work or study is reasonable use of our energy. It’s no wise to waste time under the excuse of keeping healthy, or work too much at the cost of health.(建議合理對待健康與財富)

                  大學英語三級試題及答案(3)

                  四川省大學英語三級考試樣題

                  SICHUAN COLLEGE ENGLISH SAMPLE

                  TEST

                  Band Three

                  試題冊

                  (120分鐘)

                  注意事項

                  一、請將自己的校名、姓名、學校代號、準考證號和試卷代號(A或B)分別填寫在答題紙、聽寫填空、翻譯和作文紙上。看清試卷封面上的試卷代號,你做的是A(或B)卷,應在答題紙試卷代號一欄相應的字母A(或B)上劃線。劃錯或不劃,將被判為零分,責任由考生自負。

                  二、答題前請仔細讀懂每一部分題目的說明要求。

                  三、多項選擇題的答案一定要做在答題紙上。每題只能選一個答案,多選作答錯處理。選定答案后,用2B濃度的鉛筆在相應字母的中部劃一條橫線。其正確方法是[A][B][C][D]。使用其他符號答題者不給分。劃線的濃度一定要蓋過字母底色。

                  四、如果要改動答案,必須先用橡皮擦凈原來選定的答案,然后再按上面的規定重新答題。

                  五、聽力理解第三部分聽寫填空的答案一定要寫在試卷二相應題目番號后面的空格處。一空一詞,多寫無效。翻譯和作文用鋼筆或圓珠筆分別按要求寫在試卷二的翻譯紙和作文紙上。寫在其它地方無效。注意保持卷面干凈、整潔。

                  六、考試時間為120分鐘。試卷做完后,請把試題冊(包括試卷一和試卷二)和答題紙放在桌上,一律不得帶走。待監考人員收完所有試卷之后考生方可離開考場。

                  試卷一

                  Part 1 Listening Comprehension (15%)

                  (20 minutes)

                  Section A

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear 10 short conversations. At the end of each conversation, a question will be asked about what was said. Both the conversation and the question will be spoken twice. After each question there will be a pause. During the pause, you must read the four choices marked A), B), C) and D), and decide which is the best answer. Then mark the corresponding letter on the Answer Sheet with a single line through the center.

                  Example: You will hear:

                  You will read:

                  A) A)???? At the office.

                  B) B)????? In the waiting room.

                  C) C)???? At the airport.

                  D) D)???? In a restaurant.

                  From the conversation we know that the two were talking about some work they had to finish in the evening. This is most likely to have taken place at the office. Therefore, A) “At the office” is the best answer. You should choose [A] on the Answer Sheet and mark it with a single line through the center.

                  Sample

                  Answer [A] [B] [C] [D]

                  1. A) In a classroom. B) On a sports field.

                  C) At an airport. D) By a roadside.

                  2. A) It was cancelled. B) It arrived early.

                  C) It was delayed. D) It landed on time.

                  3. A) Teacher and student. B) Doctor and patient.

                  C) Policeman and driver. D) Boss and secretary.

                  4. A) 15 minutes. B) 1 hour.

                  C) 45minctes. D) 1 hour and half.

                  5. A) She does not know how to talk with a stranger.

                  B) She wants the policeman to protect her.

                  C) She thinks that the man is strange.

                  D) She does not know how to go to the nearest hotel.

                  6. A) To her friend’s. B) To the grocery.

                  C) To the school. D) To her house.

                  7. A) In a theater. B) In a hospital.

                  C) In an office. D) In a bus.

                  8. A) The man thinks computers are useless.

                  B) The woman thinks computers are useful.

                  C) They have different opinions.

                  D) They hold similar ideas.

                  9. A) 15. B)17.

                  C) 16. D)14.

                  10. A) He doubts the woman will like the novel.

                  B) He hadn’t started reading the novel yet.

                  C) He enjoyed reading the novel.

                  D) He’ll lend the woman the novel after reading it.

                  Section B

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear a short passage. At the end of the passage, you will heat two questions. Both the passage and the questions will be spoken twice. After you hear a question, you must choose the best answer from the four choices marked A),B).C) and D). then mark the corresponding letter on the Answer Sheet with a single line through the center.

                  Questions 11 to 12 are based on the passage you have just heard.

                  11. A) At 11:20 A. M. B) At 10:50 A. M.

                  C) At 11:30 A. M. D) At 11:40 A. M.

                  12. A) She had gone to the garden alone to enjoy herself.

                  B) She had moved all the clocks and watches ahead.

                  C) She had moved a chair to the garden to sit on.

                  D) She had warned everybody against being late for their flight.

                  Section C sport Dictation

                  注意:聽力理解的C節(Section C)為聽寫填空(Spot Dictation),試題在試卷二上。現在請取出試卷二。

                  Part II Vocabulary and Structure (20%)

                  (20 minutes)

                  Directions: There are 20 incomplete sentences in this part. For each sentence there are four choices marked A), B), C) and D). Choose the ONE that best completes the sentence. Then maek the corresponding letter on the Answer Sheet with a single line through the center.

                  16. The local government warned the citizens water directly from the tap unless it is boiled.

                  A) not drink B) not drinking C) do not drink D) not to drink

                  17. His face looks but I can’t remember his name.

                  A) similar B) alike C) likely D) familiar

                  18. I went to the dentist’s yesterday, and had two teeth .

                  A) pulling B) pulled C) be pulled D) to pull

                  19. One man was instantly killed and three were in a traffic accident last night.

                  A) damaged B) harmed C) injured D) ruined

                  20. This is your letter to me. Do you object to the whole class?

                  A) to my reading it B) to read it C) me to read it D) me reading it

                  21. The economic study on market must lay an emphasis on the relationship between supply and .

                  A) demand B) as great as C) shortage D) sale

                  22. The population of the region has doubled in the past ten years.

                  A) larger than B) as great as C) more than D) as many as

                  23. The company decided to a new managing system for higher efficiency.

                  A) adjust B) adapt C) adopt D) admit

                  24. This is Mr. Evans, invention has helped hundreds of deaf people.

                  A) whose B) which C) that D) whom

                  25. There is always excitement at the Olympic Games when a previous record is .

                  A) matched B) broken C) kept D) announced

                  26. the story, Mary decided that the new film was not really worth seeing.

                  A) Have been told B) Having been told C) Being told D) Been told

                  27. We must our minds where to go for our holiday this year.

                  A) make out B) make for C) make off D) make up

                  28. Only when he finished the task that he had made a mistake.

                  A) he then realized B) did he realize C) does he realize D) he did realize

                  29. The policeman stopped my car because the engine heavy smoke.

                  A) gave off B) gave out C) gave up D) gave away

                  30. I bought a new house last year, but I my old house yet, so at the moment I have two houses.

                  A) didn’t sell B) hadn’t sold C) haven’t sold D) don’t sell

                  31. Our neighbor is a helpful person he would be right there when you need help.

                  A) so … that B) such … as C) such … that D) so … as

                  32. He cannot play tennis here until the manager recommends that he a member of the club.

                  A) is B) has been C) will be D) be

                  33. Take the raincoat with you it rains.

                  A) in any case B) in case of C) in the case of D) in case

                  34. paper and printing invented by the Chinese, the world civilization would not have been so wonderful as it is today.

                  A) If there was not B) There had not been C) Had there not been D) If there were not

                  35. We had to put the meeting off so many people were absent.

                  A) since B) unless C) lest D) though

                  Part III Reading Comprehension (40%)

                  (35 minutes)

                  Directions: There are four short reading passages in this part . each passage is followed by five questions or unfinished statements. For each of them there are four choices marked A),B),C) and D). You should decide on the best answer and mark the corresponding letter on the Answer Sheet with a single line through the center.

                  Passage One

                  Question 36 to 40 are based on the following passage.

                  Natural rubber is obtained from rubber as a white, milky liquid known as latex (橡槳) . This is treated with acid and dried, before it is sent to countries throughout the world. As the rubber industry developed, more and more rubber was required. Rubber plantations (種植園) were set up in countries with a hot, humid climate, but these still could not supply sufficient raw rubber to satisfy the requirements of developing industry.

                  It was unsatisfactory for industry to depend on supplies coming from so far away from the industrial areas of Europe. It was always possible that supplies could be stopped by wars or shipping trouble.

                  For many years, attempts were made to produce a substitute, but they were unsuccessful. Finally, aw method was discovered of producing artificial rubber which is in many ways superior and in some ways inferior (劣的)to natural rubber. Artificial rubber is produced in factories by a complicated chemical process. It is usually cheaper than natural rubber.

                  At present, the world requirements for rubber are so great that both natural and artificial rubber are used in large quantities.

                  36. The demand for raw rubber has been on the rise along with the development of in the world.

                  A) plantations B)transportation C)industry D)trade

                  37. Raw rubber used to be produced mainly .

                  A) within Europe B)in dry countries C)in industrial countries D)outside Europe

                  38. Compared with artificial rubber, natural rubber is .

                  A) expensive B)cheap C)inferior D) superior

                  39. The direct cause of the production of artificial rubber was .

                  A) A)???? the great difficulty of shipping raw rubber

                  B) B)????? the high qualities of artificial rubber

                  C) C)???? the insufficient supplies of natural rubber

                  D) D)???? the great cost of natural rubber

                  40. The best title for this passage should be .

                  A) Natural Rubber B)The Cost for Rubber C)Artificial Rubber D)The Value of Rubber

                  Passage Two

                  Questions 41to 45 are based on the following passage.

                  Noise, commonly defined as unpleasant sound, is a kind of environmental pollution. Particularly in crowded urban areas, the noise produced as a by-product of our advancing technology causes physical and psychological harm, and seriously affects the quality of the those who are suffering from it.

                  Unlike the eye, the ear has no lid; therefore noise penetrates it easily. Loud noises signal a big danger to human beings. In response, the heart would beat faster, the skin would become pale, and the muscles would get tense. As a matter of fact, some of these responses persist even longer than the noise, occasionally as long as thirty minutes after the sound has ceased.

                  Because noise is unavoidable in a complex, industrial society, we are constantly responding in the same ways that we would respond to danger. Recently, researchers have concluded that noise and our response may be much more than an annoyance. It may be a serious threat to physical and psychological health and well-being (安樂) ,causing damage not only to the ear and brain but also to the heart and stomach. We have long known that hearing loss is a number one nonfatal (非致命的) health problem, but now we are learning that some of us with heart disease and cancers may be affected by noise pollution as well.

                  41. What is the author’s main point?

                  A) A)???? Loud noises signal a big danger.

                  B) B)????? Noise may be a serious threat to our health.

                  C) C)???? Hearing loss is a number one nonfatal health problem.

                  D) D)???? Noise is unavoidable in daily life.

                  42. What does the word “noise” mean in this passage?

                  A) A)???? A by-product of technology.

                  B) B)????? Unpleasant sound.

                  C) C)???? Physical and psychology harm.

                  D) D)???? A danger to people’s life.

                  43. Which of the following is true according to the passage?

                  A) A)???? Noise is our number one problem.

                  B) B)????? Our response might last longer than the noise itself.

                  C) C)???? Our body could resist the noise quite effectively.

                  D) D)???? Noise is limited to urban areas.

                  44. According to the passage, the human being’s immediate response to noise may be the following EXCEPT that .

                  A) A)???? the heart would beat faster.

                  B) B)????? The skin would become pale

                  C) C)???? The muscles would get tense

                  D) D)???? The hands would cover up the ears

                  45. The word “it” (Line 4, Paragraph 1) refers to .

                  A) harm B) life C) technology D) noise

                  Passage Three

                  Questions 46 to 50 are based on the following passage.

                  Anyone who doubts that global (全球性的)financial markets control national economies need only look at the crisis facing the“tigers”of the Far East。The situation in Asia shows how power has shifted from individual governments to the markets。

                  The trend towards globalisation began in the early 1970s when the system of fixed exchange rates, set up after World War II, stopped functioning. This meant that the value of currencies(貨幣)would now be determined by the markets instead of individual governments. By 1990, nearly all world’s major economies had got rid of restrictions on how much money could be moved in and out of their countries.

                  Other factors contributing to the rise of globalisation are new communications technologies, and better transportation systems. These have enabled companies to grow into multinationals—producing goods on one side of the planet and selling them on the other.

                  As we approach the century, the trend of globalisation seems unstoppable. However, a look at history suggests that things may not go that smoothly. The last time the world tried to create a global economy, its efforts were spoiled by a world war and the worst depression(經濟大蕭條)in history. How successful it will be this time depends on how much we have learnt from the past.

                  46. What would happen along with the global economy?

                  A) A)???? Free movement of goods and capital between countries.

                  B) B)????? Firm control of national economies by the governments.

                  C) C)???? The great depressions in many countries.

                  D) D)???? Economic crises in developing countries.

                  47. The word “multinationals”most probably means .

                  A) A)???? companies producing many kinds of goods

                  B) B)????? companies controlling economies of several countries

                  C) C)???? companies having branches in several countries

                  D) D)???? companies operating many factories within a district

                  48. According to this passage, national economies in most countries are now controlled by

                  A) global markets B) individual governments

                  C) large companies D) several multinationals

                  49) Which of the following does NOT appear in the process of globalization?

                  A) A)???? New communications technologies.

                  B) B)????? Better transportation systems.

                  C) C)???? Global financial markets.

                  D) D)???? Fixed exchange rates.

                  50. To create a global economy, it is very important for us .

                  A) A)???? to keep world peace

                  B) B)????? to develop multinationals

                  C) C)???? to promote transportation

                  D) D)???? to control national economies

                  Passage Four

                  Questions 51 to 55 are based on the following passage.

                  EL Nino(厄爾尼諾)has existed for a long time. It was first observed by Peruvian fishermen, who noticed that the sea warmed up every few years around Christmas time. They named the phenomenon EL Nino, which is Spanish for “the child”, and refers to the young Christ.

                  In more recent years, scientists have established that EL Nino appears every two to seven years. Its cause is still unknown, but it’s clear that when it does appear, it can disrupt(擾亂)weather patterns over three quarters of the earth, in affects the world’s weather system more than any other phenomenon except the seasons. That EL Nino killed over 2,000 people in floods and droughts(旱災)and caused $13 billion worth of damage.

                  Plenty is now known about EL Nino’s destructive potential, but the phenomenon itself remains mysterious. Despite years of research, scientists are still unable to predict how destructive an EL Nino will be when it arrives. However, progress is being made on forecasting when one will occur. This is very important because, if enough warning is given, steps can be taken to limit the destruction and suffering that following a bad EL Nino. At the very least, farmers would know whether to plant dry-or wet-weather crops.

                  51. Peruvian fishermen named the phenomenon EL Nino probably because .

                  A) A)???? it appeared every few years

                  B) B)????? they observed it first

                  C) C)???? it appeared around Christmas time

                  D) D)???? the sea noticeably warmed up

                  52. Which of the following affects the world’s weather system most powerfully?

                  A) A)???? EL Ninos. B) The seasons. C) Floods. D) Droughts.

                  53. Despite the efforts made by scientists, they are still unable .

                  A) A)???? to predict EL Nino’s destructive potential

                  B) B)????? to forecast when an EL Nino will occur

                  C) C)???? to warn people of an WL Nino’s arrival

                  D) D)???? to determine the cause of EL Nino

                  54. El Nino affects the world’s weather system by .

                  A) A)???? disrupting weather patterns

                  B) B)????? causing floods and droughts

                  C) C)???? changing the seasons

                  D) D)???? destroying the crops

                  55. Forecasting an EL Nino helps .

                  A) A)???? to plant dry-weather crops

                  B) B)????? to understand the phenomenon better

                  C) C)???? to decrease its destructive effects

                  D) D)???? to prevent its possible destruction

                  Part IV Translation from English into Chinese

                  (10%) (15 minutes)

                  Directions: In this part, there are four sentences which you should translate into Chinese. These are all taken from the Reading Passages you have just read in Part Three of the Test Paper. You are allowed 15 minutes to do the translation. You can refer back to the passages so as to identify the meaning in the context. Write your translation on the Translation Sheet.

                  1. 1.???????????????????? (Lines 2 –3,Paragraph 3, Passage 1)

                  Finally, aw method was discovered of producing artificial rubber which is in many ways superior and in some ways inferior (劣的)to natural rubber. Artificial rubber is produced in factories by a complicated chemical process. It is usually cheaper than natural rubber.

                  2. 2.???????????????????? (Lines 1 –2,Paragraph 3, Passage 2)

                  Because noise is unavoidable in a complex, industrial society, we are constantly responding in the same ways that we would respond to danger.

                  3. 3.???????????????????? (Lines 2 –4,Paragraph 2, Passage 3)

                  This meant that the value of currencies(貨幣)would now be determined by the markets instead of individual governments.

                  4. 4.???????????????????? (Lines 4 –6,Paragraph 3, Passage 4)

                  …if enough warning is given, steps can be taken to limit the destruction and suffering that following a bad EL Nino.

                  Part V Writing (15%)

                  (30 minutes)

                  Directions: For this part you are allowed 30 minutes to write a composition of no less than 80 words on Family Cars in China. Remember your composition must be written according to the following outline. Write your composition on the Composition Sheet.

                  Outline:

                  1. 1.??????????????? 小汽車正在進入中國家庭。

                  2. 2.??????????????? 家用汽車的利和弊。

                  Words for reference:

                  Convenience, travel, cost, traffic jam, pollution, fuel

                  試卷二

                  聽寫填空

                  Spot Dictation

                  Section C

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear a passage three times. Listen carefully during the first reading. Then listen to the passage again. When it is being read the second time, you should fill in the six blanks numbered from 13 a) to 15 b) with the exact words or phrases you have just heard. Finally, when the passage is read for the third time, you should check what you have written.

                  In the eighteenth century, cities became larger and larger. People moved from the countryside and small towns to the cities, 13 a) there was more work for them to do.

                  On Sundays and holidays, they liked to leave the cities and have a good time in the countryside. But not every family had a horse and 13 b) . People needed another form of transportation. 14 a) in many countries tried to meet this need. The first bicycle appeared 14 b) . People called it “the horse on wheels”.

                  People liked bicycles because they weren’t as 15 a) as horses. They didn’t need to build a special house to keep them in, and they didn’t have 15 b) them. They could ride them in the city and in the countryside.

                  Everybody in the family could ride ---men and women, girls and boys.

                  Today people in every country in the world ride bicycles.

                  翻譯紙

                  ?Translation Sheet

                  Part IV Translation from English into Chinese

                  (10%) (15 minutes)

                  Directions: In this part, there are four sentences which you should translate into Chinese. These are all taken from the Reading Passages you have just read in Part Three of the Test Paper.

                  You are allowed 15 minutes to do the translation. You can refer back to the passages so as to identify the meaning in the context. Write your translation on this Translation Sheet.

                  1.(Lines 2 –3,Paragraph 3, Passage 1)

                  Finally, aw method was discovered of producing artificial rubber which is in many ways superior and in some ways inferior (劣的)to natural rubber. Artificial rubber is produced in factories by a complicated chemical process. It is usually cheaper than natural rubber.

                  2.(Lines 1 –2,Paragraph 3, Passage 2)

                  Because noise is unavoidable in a complex, industrial society, we are constantly responding in the same ways that we would respond to danger.

                  3.(Lines 2 –4,Paragraph 2, Passage 3)

                  This meant that the value of currencies(貨幣)would now be determined by the markets instead of individual governments.

                  4.(Lines 4 –6,Paragraph 3, Passage 4)

                  …if enough warning is given, steps can be taken to limit the destruction and suffering that following a bad EL Nino.

                  作文紙

                  Composition Sheet

                  Part V Writing (15%)

                  (30 minutes)

                  Directions: For this part you are allowed 30mintes to write a composition of no less than 100 words on Family Cars in China. Remember your composition must be written according to the following outline. Write your composition on the Composition Sheet.

                  Outline:

                  1. 1.? 小汽車正在進入中國家庭

                  2. 2.? 家用汽車的利和弊。

                  Words for reference: convenience, travel, cost, traffic jam, pollution, fuel

                  Family Cars in China

                  四川省大學英語三級考試樣題

                  參考答案

                  Key to 1-55

                  Part I (1-15)

                  1-5 C B D A D 6-10 B A C A C

                  11-12 D B B B C

                  13 a) where 13b) carriage 14a) inventors 14b)in 1790 15a)expensive 15b)to feed

                  Part II (16-35)

                  16-20 D D B C A 21-25 A C C A B

                  26-30 B D B A C 31-35 C D D C A

                  Part III (36-55)

                  36-40 C D A C C 41-45 B B B D D

                  46-50 A C A D A 51-55 C B D A C

                  Part IV

                  , aw method was discovered of producing artificial rubber which is in many ways superior and in some ways inferior (劣的)to natural rubber. Artificial rubber is produced in factories by a complicated chemical process. It is usually cheaper than natural rubber.

                  最后,發現了一種生產人造橡膠的方法:人造橡膠在許多方面優于天然橡膠,在某些方面又劣于天然橡膠。

                  2.Because noise is unavoidable in a complex, industrial society, we are constantly responding in the same ways that we would respond to danger.

                  在一個錯綜復雜的工業社會里,由于噪音無法避免,我們總是會像對待任何危險事物那樣對其立即作出反應。

                  3.This meant that the value of currencies(貨幣)would now be determined by the markets instead of individual governments.

                  這就意味著貨幣的價值由市場而不是由各國政府決定。

                  4.…if enough warning is given, steps can be taken to limit the destruction and suffering that following a bad EL Nino.

                  如果事先得到充分的警報,就可采取措施,減輕嚴重的厄爾尼諾帶來的破壞和災難。

                  Part V

                  Composition Model (for Reference only)

                  Family Cars in China

                  With the development of car industry and the improvement of the people’s living standard in China, more and more cars are going into Chinese families. Some families have cars made in China, and others own cars imported from abroad. They drive them either to work or for holidays.

                  Cars have quite a number of advantages. It is very convenient to travel by cars, and this saves a lot of time. As a means of transportation easy to handle, family cars can carry not only people, but also goods. They can go almost anywhere owing to their small size. That’s why more and more families are trying to buy them.

                  However, just as a coin has two sides, cars also have some disadvantages. They cost the owners a lot of money for the fuel, insurance and maintenance; they are responsible for air pollution; and what’s more, car accidents kill hundreds of people each year and traffic jams happen very often. All these cause us many problems. Therefore, we should work out some ways to solve them.

                  大學英語三級試題及答案(4)

                  大學英語三級作文模擬試題

                  模擬試題1 :

                  Directions: For this part, you are allowed 30minutes to write a composition on the topic On old worshipping . You should write at least 100 words, and base your composition on the outline given in Chinese below:

                  1. 許多青少年將娛樂明星當做崇拜偶像;

                  2. 對此現象不同的人有不同的看法;

                  3. 你對此事的看法。

                  模擬試題2 :

                  Directions: For this part, you are allowed 30minutes to write a composition on the topic My ideal job . You should write at least 100 words, and base your composition on the outline given in Chinese below:

                  1. 我理想職業是……,我喜歡它的原因是……

                  2. 我如何為它做好準備。

                  模擬試題3:

                  Directions: For this part, you are allowed 30minutes to write a composition on the topic Food safety You should write at least 100 words, and base your composition on the outline given in Chinese below:

                  1. 現在食品安全方面的問題頻出:

                  2. 你認為造成這些問題可能的原因;

                  3. 解決辦法。

                  模擬試題4:

                  Directions: For this part, you are allowed 30minutes to write a letter of complaint . You should write at least 100 words, and base your composition on the outline given in Chinese below:

                  大學英語三級試題及答案(5)

                  College English Band Three

                  Part Listening Comprehension

                  1. A) To cancel his trip. B) To go to bed early.

                  C) To catch a later flight. D) To ask for a wake-up call.

                  2. A) They have different opinions as to what to do next.

                  B) They have to pay for the house by installments.

                  C) They will fix a telephone in the bathroom.

                  D) The man’s attitude is more sensible than the woman’s.

                  3. A) She will save the stamps for the man’s sister. B) She will no longer get letters from Canada.

                  C) She can’t give the stamps to the man’s sister. D) She has given the stamps to the man’s roommates.

                  4. A) Visiting the Brownings. B) Writing a postcard.

                  C) Looking for a postcard. D) Filling in a form.

                  5. A) The man should work with somebody else. B) The man should meet his partner’s needs.

                  C) They should come to a compromise. D) They should find a better lab for the project.

                  6. A) She can’t finish her assignment, either. B) She can’t afford a computer right now.

                  C) The man can use her computer. D) The man should buy a computer right away.

                  7. A) The visiting economist has given several lectures.

                  B) The guest lecturer’s opinion is different from Dr. Johnson’s.

                  C) Dr. Johnson and the guest speaker were schoolmates.

                  D) Dr. Johnson invited the economist to visit their college.

                  8. A) She’s never watched a better game. B) Football is-her favorite pastime.

                  C) The game has been canceled. D) Their team played very badly.

                  9. A) The man should stick to what he’s doing. B) The man should take up a new hobby.

                  C) The man should stop playing tennis. D) The man should find the cause for his failure.

                  10. A) An invented story. B) A real life experience.

                  C) An imaginary situation. D) A terrible nightmare.

                  Section B

                  Passage 1

                  11. A) The name of a German town B) A resident of Frankfurt.

                  C) A kind of German sausage. D) A kind of German bread.

                  12. A) He sold fast food. B) He raised dogs.

                  C) He was A cook. D) He was a Cartoonist.

                  13. A) Because the Americans found they were from Germany.

                  B) Because people thought they contained dog meat.

                  C) Because people had to get used to their taste.

                  D) Because it was too hot to eat right away.

                  Passage 2

                  14. A) They give out faint cries. B) They make noises to drive away insects.

                  C) They extend their water pipes. D) They become elastic like rubber bands.

                  15. A) Quiet plants. B) Well-watered plants. C) Healthy plants. D) Thirsty plants.

                  16. A) They could drive the insects away. B) They could keep the plants well-watered.

                  C) They could make the plants grow faster. D) They could build devices to trap insects.

                  Passage 3

                  17. A) To look for a different lifestyle. B) To enjoy themselves.

                  C) For adventure. D) For education.

                  18. A) There are 200 vehicles for every kilometer of roadway. B) It has a dense population.

                  C) There are many museums and palaces. D) It has many towering buildings.

                  19. A) It is a city of contrasts. B) It possesses many historical sites.

                  C) It is an important industrial center. D) It has many big and beautiful parks.

                  20. A) It helps develop our personalities. B) It enables us to acquire first-hand knowledge.

                  C) It makes our life more interesting. D) It brings about changes in our lifestyle.

                  Part Cloze

                    There are many superstitions in Britain, but one of the most __ 31__ held is that it is unlucky to walk under a ladder even if it means __32__ the pavement into a busy street! __33__ you must pass under a ladder you can __34__ bad luck by crossing your fingers and __35__ them crossed until you have seen a dog. __36__ , you may lick your finger and __37__ a cross on the toe of your shoe, and not look again at the shoe until the __38__ has dried.

                    Another common __39__ is that it is unlucky to open an umbrella in the house-it will either bring __40__ to the person who opened it or to the whole __41__. Anyone opening an umbrella in fine weather is __42__, as it inevitably brings rain!

                    The number 13 is said to be unlucky for some, and when the 13th day of the month __43__ on a Friday, anyone wishing to avoid a bad event had better stay __44__. the worst misfortune that can happen to a person is caused by breaking a mirror, __45__ it brings seven years of bad luck! The superstition is supposed to __46__ in ancient times, when mirrors were considered to be tools of the gods.

                    Black cats are generally considered lucky in Britain, even though they are __47__ witchcraft…… it is __48__ lucky if a black cat crosses your path-although in America the exact opposite belief prevails.

                  Finally, a commonly held superstition is that of touching wood __49__ luck. This measure is most often taken if you think you have said something that is tempting fate, such as "my car has never __50__, touch wood?"

                  Part Reading Comprehension

                  Text A

                    In the case of mobile phones, change is everything. Recent research indicates that the mobile phone is changing not only our culture, but our very bodies as well.

                    First, let"s talk about culture. The difference between the mobile phone and its parent, the fixed-line phone, you get whoever answers it.

                    This has several implications. The most common one, however, and perhaps the thing that has changed our culture forever, is the "meeting" influence. People no longer need to make firm plans about when and where to meet. Twenty years ago, a Friday night would need to be arranged in advance. You needed enough time to allow everyone to get from their place of work to the first meeting place. Now, however, a night out can be arranged on the run. It is no longer "see you there at 8", but "text me around 8 and we"ll see where we all are".

                    Texting changes people as well. In their paper, "insights into the Social and Psychological Effects of SMS Text Messaging", two British researchers distinguished between two types of mobile phone users: the "talkers" and the "texters"-those who prefer voice to text message and those who prefer text to voice.

                    They found that the mobile phone"s individuality and privacy gave texters the ability to express a whole new outer personality. Texters were likely to report that their family would be surprised if they were to read their texts. This suggests that texting allowed texters to present a self-image that differed from the one familiar to those who knew them well.

                    Another scientist wrote of the changes that mobiles have brought to body language. There are two kinds that people use while speaking on the phone. There is the "speakeasy": the head is held high, in a self-confident way, chatting away. And there is the "spacemaker": these people focus on themselves and keep out other people.

                    Who can blame them? Phone meetings get cancelled or reformed and camera-phones intrude on people"s privacy. So, it is understandable if your mobile makes you nervous. But perhaps you needn"t worry so much. After all, it is good to talk.

                  41. When people plan to meet nowadays, they________________.

                  A) arrange the meeting place beforehand   B) postpone fixing the place till last minute

                  C) seldom care about when and where to meet D) still love to work out detailed meeting plans.

                  42. According to the two British researchers, the social and psychological effect are mostly likely to be seen on__.

                  A) Talkers   B) the "speakeasy"  C) the "spacemaker"   D) texters

                  43. We can infer from the passage that the texts sent by texters are________.

                  A) quite revealing  B) well written   C) unacceptable by others  D) shocking to others

                  44. According to the passage, who is afraid of being heard while talking on the mobile?

                  A) talkers    B) the speakeasy   C) the spacemaker   D) texters

                  45. An appropriate title for the passage might be_________.

                  A) the SMS effect    B) cultural implication of mobile use

                   C) change in the use of the mobile   D) body language and the mobile phone!

                  Text B

                  Over the last 25 years, British society has changed a great deal-or at least many parts of it have. In some ways, however, very little has changed, particularly where attitudes are concerned. Ideas about social class-whether a person is "working-class" or "middle-class"-are one area in which changes have been extremely slow.

                    In the past, the working-class tended to be paid less than middle-class people, such as teachers and doctors. As a result of this and also of the fact that workers" jobs were generally much less secure, distinct differences in life-styles and attitudes came into existence. The typical working man would collect his wages on Friday evening and then, it was widely believed, having given his wife her "housekeeping", would go out and squander the rest on beer and betting.

                    The stereotype of what a middle-class man did with his money was perhaps nearer the truth. He was-and still is - inclined to take a longer-term view. Not only did he regard buying a house of these provided him and his family with security. Only in very few cases did workers have the opportunity (or the education and training) to make such long-term plans.

                    Nowadays, a great deal has changed. In a large number of cases factory workers earn as much, if not more, than their middle-class supervisors. Social security and laws to improve century, have made it less necessary than before to worry about "tomorrow". Working-class people seem slowly to be losing the feeling of inferiority they had in the past. In fact there has been a growing tendency in the past few years for the middle-classes to feel slightly ashamed of their position.

                    The changes in both life-styles and attitudes are probably most easily seen amongst younger people. They generally tend to share very similar tastes in music and clothes, they spend their money in having a good time, and save for holidays or longer-term plans when necessary. There seems to be much less difference than in precious generations. Nevertheless, we still have a wide gap between the well-paid (whatever the type of job they may have) and the low-paid. As long as this gap exists, there will always be a possibility that new conflicts and jealousies will emerge, or rather that the old conflicts will re-appear, but between different groups.

                  46. Which of the following is seen as the cause of class differences in the past?

                  A) Life style and occupation   B) Attitude and income

                   C) income and job security   D) job security and hobbies

                  47. The writer seems to suggest that the description of ___________ is closer to truth.

                  A) middle -class ways of spending money   B) working-class ways of spending the weekend

                   C) working-class drinking habits  D) middle-class attitudes

                  48. According to the passage, which of the following is not a typical feature of the middle -class?

                  A) desiring for security   B) Making long term plans

                   C) having priorities in life   D) saving money

                  49. Working -class people"s sense of security increased as a result of all the following factors except?

                  A) better social security   B) more job opportunities

                  C) higher living standard  D) better legal protection.

                  50 Which of the following statement is incorrect?

                  A) Changes are slowly taking place in all sectors of the British society.

                  B) The gap between working -class and middle- class young people is narrowing

                  C) Different in income will remain but those in occupation will disappear

                  D) middle-class people may sometimes feel inferior to working-class people!

                  Text C

                  For several days I saw little of Mr. Rochester. In the morning, he seemed much occupied with business, and in the afternoon gentlemen from the neighborhood called and some times stayed to dine with him. When his foot was well enough, he rode out a great deal.

                    During this time, all my knowledge of him was limited to occasional meetings about the house, when he would sometimes pass me coldly, and sometimes bow and smile. His changes of manner did not offend me, because I saw that I had nothing to do with the cause of them.

                    One evening, several days later, I was invited to talk to Mr. Rochester after dinner. He was sitting in his armchair, and looked not quite so severe, and much less gloomy. There was a smile on his lips, and his eyes were bright, probably with wine. As I was looking at him, he suddenly turned, and asked me, "do you think I"m handsome, Miss Eyre?"

                    The answer somehow slipped from my tongue before I realized it: "No, sir."

                    "Ah, you really are unusual! You are a quiet, serious little person, but you can be almost rude."

                    "Sir, I"m sorry. I should have said that beauty doesn"t matter, or something like that,"

                    "No, you shouldn"t! I see, you criticize my appearance, and then you stab me in the back! You have honesty and feeling. There are not many girls like you. But perhaps I go too fast. Perhaps you have awful faults to counterbalance your few good points

                    I thought to myself that he might have too. He seemed to read my mind, and said quickly," yes, you"re right. I have plenty of faults. I went the wrong way when I was twenty-one, and have never found the right path again. I might have been very different. I might have been as good as you, and perhaps wiser. I am not a bad man, take my word for it, but I have done wrong. It wasn"t my character, but circumstances which were to blame. Why do I tell you all this? Because you"re the sort of person people tell their problems and secrets to, because you"re sympathetic and give them hope."

                    It seemed he had quite a lot to talk to me. He didn"t seem to like to finish the talk quickly, as was the case for the first time.

                    "Don"t be afraid of me, Miss Eyre." He continued. “You don"t relax or laugh very much; perhaps because of the effect Lowood school has had on you. But in time, you will be more natural with me, and laugh, and speak freely. You"re like a bird in a cage. When you get out of the cage, you"ll fly very high. Good night.”

                  51. At the beginning Miss Eyre’s impressions of Mr. Rochester were all except__________.

                  A) busy B) sociable C) friendly D) changeable

                  52. In "……and all my knowledge him was limited to occasional meetings about the house…".the word about means______________.

                  A) around B) on C) outside D) concerning.

                  53. Why did Mr. Rochester say" …and then you stab me in the back!"

                  A) because Jane had intended to kill him with a knife  

                  B) because Jane had intended to be more critical.

                  C) because Jane had regretted having talked to him  

                  D) because Jane had said something else to correct herself.

                  54. From what Mr. Rochester told Miss Eyre, we can conclude that he wanted to__________.

                  A) Tell her all his troubles B) tell her his life experience.

                  C) change her opinion of him D) change his circumstances

                  55. At the end of the passage , Mr. Rochester sounded__________.

                  A) rude B) cold C) friendly D) encouraging.

                  Part Writing

                  Section A: Note-writing

                  Write a note about 50-60 words based on the following situation:

                  Lily, your roommate, is looking for a part-time job in the coming summer vacation. You saw an ad for a private English tutor for a schoolboy. Write her a note, telling her what the job is and strongly recommending it to her.

                  Section B: Will Tourism Bring Harm to the Environment?

                  You are to write in three parts.

                  In the first part, state specifically what your opinion is.

                  In the second part, provide one or two reasons to support your opinion.

                  In the last part, bring what you have written to a natural conclusion or make a summary.

                  大學英語三級試題及答案(6)

                  大學英語三級全真模擬聽力試題及答案


                  ———————————————————————————————— 作者:

                  ———————————————————————————————— 日期:

                  大學英語三級全真模擬聽力試題(一)

                  Test One

                  Part I: Listening Comprehension (15%)

                  Section A

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear 10 short conversations. At the end of each conversation, a question will be asked about what was said. Both the conversation and the question will be spoken only once. After each question there will be a pause. During the pause, you must choose the best answer from the four choices marked A), B), C) and D. Then mark the corresponding letter on the Answer Sheet with a single line through the center.

                  Example: You will hear: Where do you think the conversation most provably took place?

                  You will read:

                  A) At the office.

                  B) In the waiting room.

                  C) At the airport.

                  D) In a restaurant.

                  From the conversation we know that the two were talking about some work they had to finish in the evening. This is most likely to have taken place at the office. Therefore, A) “At the office” is the best answer. You should choose [A] on the Answer Sheet and mark it with a single line through the center.

                  Sample Answer [A] [B] [C] [D]

                  1. A) Fixing an engine. B) Repairing a car.

                  C) Cashing a check. D) Buying some wheels.

                  2. A) Visit Japan. B) Cook some food.

                  C) Travel abroad. D) Eat out.

                  3. A) One of a cheaper price. B) One of a different color.

                  C) One of a fashionable style. D) One of a smaller size.

                  4. A) He has changed his plan. B) He has canceled his trip.

                  C) He is arriving this afternoon. D) He forgot to arrange his trip.

                  5. A) They had lost their way. B) They were told it would rain.

                  C) They were caught in the rain. D) They had taken an umbrella.

                  6. A) They will take the bus at 11 o’clock.

                  B) The bus is late.

                  C) The bus has already arrived.

                  D) The woman thought the bus would arrive at 11:20.

                  7. A) The man shouldn’t drink either.

                  B) Drinking is better than smoking.

                  C) The man should switch to drinking.

                  D) The man could smoke a little.

                  8. A) In a bookstore.

                  B) At a museum

                  C) At a zoo.

                  D) On a college campus.

                  9. A) Teacher and student.

                  B) Shop assistant and customer.

                  C) Tourist and travel agent.

                  D) Husband and wife.

                  10. A) She will stop to take a rest.

                  B) She will work for three hours.

                  C) She will have her back checked.

                  D) She will buy a computer in three hours.

                  Section B

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear a short passage. At the end of the passage, you will hear two questions. Both the passage and the questions will be spoken twice. After you hear a question, you must choose the best answer from the four choices marked A),B),C) and D. Then mark the corresponding letter on the Answer Sheet with a single line through the center.

                  Questions 11 to 12 are based on the passage you have just heard.

                  11. A. There are only 23 hours in a day

                  B. There are 8 days in a week

                  C. There are one more hour in a day

                  D. All of the above

                  12. A. Set one hour ahead in each new time zone.

                  B. Set one hour ahead for the whole trip.

                  C. Set one full day back for the whole trip.

                  D. Set 12 hours back.

                  Section C

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear a passage three times. Listen during the first reading. Then listen to carefully the passage again. When it is being read the second time, you should fill in the six blanks numbered form S1 to S6 with the exact words or phrases you have just heard. Finally, when the passage is read for the third time, you should check what you have written.

                  Information has always been at the center of human communication. You may ask why. Well, communication between people involves giving and receiving information. The way we give and receive information today has S1____________ a revolution in the development of the mass media in the 20th century.

                  The first truly mass communication medium was the newspaper. For the first time in history, people could read about S2____________ in their country and from around the world every day. However, there were two problems with newspapers of that time. S3____________, newspapers were available only in large cities, for getting newspapers to the countryside was a difficult and time-consuming task. Secondly, newspapers weren"t always S4____________, as there was a limited range of opinions.

                  Nowadays, we can S5____________ from a wide variety of sources to get information. Television and the Internet have given us the chance to be informed about everything the S6_____________ it happens. Numerous radio and TV stations, satellite channels and millions of websites help people keep up with the latest news. People live history and are part of it.

                  大學英語三級全真模擬聽力試題(二)

                  Test Two

                  Section A

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear 10 short conversations. At the end of each conversation, a question will be asked about what was said. Both the conversation and the question will be spoken only once. After each question there will be a pause. During the pause, you must choose the best answer from the four choices marked A), B), C) and D. Then mark the corresponding letter on the Answer Sheet with a single line through the center.

                  Example: You will hear: Where do you think the conversation most provably took place?

                  You will read:

                  A) At the office.

                  B) In the waiting room.

                  C) At the airport.

                  D) In a restaurant.

                  From the conversation we know that the two were talking about some work they had to finish in the evening. This is most likely to have taken place at the office. Therefore, A) “At the office” is the best answer. You should choose [A] on the Answer Sheet and mark it with a single line through the center.

                  Sample Answer [A] [B] [C] [D]

                  1. A) Carol. B) Jim.

                  C) Paul. D) The woman.

                  2. A) 11:00. B) 11:30.

                  C) 12:00. D) 12:30.

                  3. A) 5. B) 12.

                  C) 14. D) 16.

                  4. A) Go to the post office. B) Go down the street.

                  C) Cross the street. D) Go to the cinema.

                  5. A) Denis. B) John.

                  C) Mary. D) The woman.

                  6. A)To get more advice. B)To get more exercise.

                  C)To get married. D)To get a job.

                  7. A) Mr. Johnson will be busy tomorrow morning.

                  B) Mr. Johnson will be busy tomorrow.

                  C).Tomorrow afternoon will be fine.

                  D) The man can meet Mr. Johnson the day after tomorrow.

                  8. A) A dentist. B) Her teacher.

                  C) Her brother. D) Her friends.

                  9. A) He’s a receptionist. B) He’s a tour guide.

                  C) He’s a shopkeeper. D) He’s an accountant.

                  10. A) At a theater. B) In a waiting room.

                  C) In a supermarket. D) In a restaurant.

                  Section B

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear a short passage. At the end of the passage, you will hear two questions. Both the passage and the questions will be spoken twice. After you hear a question, you must choose the best answer from the four choices marked A),B),C) and D. Then mark the corresponding letter on the Answer Sheet with a single line through the center.

                  Questions 11 to 12 are based on the passage you have just heard.

                  11. A) Teachers made children sit still for a long time.

                  B) Children must learn and discover things themselves.

                  C) Children had to repeat things till they could remember them.

                  D) School is like a prison to some children.

                  12. A) They haven’t learnt anything in school.

                  B) Their teachers don’t allow them to work.

                  C) Their parents don’t allow them to work

                  D) The law does not allow them to work.

                  Section C

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear a passage three times. Listen during the first reading. Then listen to carefully the passage again. When it is being read the second time, you should fill in the six blanks numbered form S1 to S6 with the exact words or phrases you have just heard. Finally, when the passage is read for the third time, you should check what you have written.

                  One way to think about time is to imagine a world without time. There could be no movement, because time and movement cannot be S1____________. A world without time could exist only as long as there were no changes. For time and change are linked. We know that time has passed when something changes.

                  In the real world -- the world with time -- changes never stop. Some changes happen only once in a S2____________; others happen repeatedly. Humans always have noted S3____________ events that repeat themselves. When people began to count such events, they began to measure time.

                  In early human history, the only changes that seemed to repeat themselves evenly were the movements of S4____________ in the sky. The most easily seen result of these movements was the difference between light and darkness.

                  The sun rises in the eastern sky, S5____________ light. It moves across the sky and sinks in the west, causing darkness. The appearance and disappearance of the sun was even and unfailing. The periods of light and darkness it created were the first S6____________ periods of time. We have named each period of light and darkness -- one day.

                  大學英語三級全真模擬聽力試題(三)

                  Test Three

                  Section A

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear 10 short conversations. At the end of each conversation, a question will be asked about what was said. Both the conversation and the question will be spoken only once. After each question there will be a pause. During the pause, you must choose the best answer from the four choices marked A), B), C) and D. Then mark the corresponding letter on the Answer Sheet with a single line through the center.

                  Example: You will hear: Where do you think the conversation most provably took place?

                  You will read:

                  A) At the office.

                  B) In the waiting room.

                  C) At the airport.

                  D) In a restaurant.

                  From the conversation we know that the two were talking about some work they had to finish in the evening. This is most likely to have taken place at the office. Therefore, A) “At the office” is the best answer. You should choose [A] on the Answer Sheet and mark it with a single line through the center.

                  Sample Answer [A] [B] [C] [D]

                  1. A) A policewoman.

                  B) A hotel clerk.

                  C) A waitperson.

                  D) A shop assistant.

                  2. A) The lady bought the desk lamp when she was in Hong Kong.

                  B) The lady bought the desk lamp in China last winter.

                  C) The lady’s friend got it on the Internet for her.

                  D) The lady’s friend bought it in China.

                  3. A) He didn’t attend the lecture.

                  B) He fell asleep on the train.

                  C) He caught the early train to attend the lecture.

                  D) The train broke down and he was late for the lecture.

                  4. A) 08:00.

                  B) 08:15.

                  C) 08:30.

                  D) 08:50.

                  5. A) His car key.

                  B) His overcoat

                  C) The sofa.

                  D) The table.

                  6. A) The man can’t swim.

                  B) The man can swim after he has done his homework.

                  C) The man can’t swim because he doesn’t know the way.

                  D) The man can swim if he knows the way.

                  7. A) She does not work on rainy days.

                  B) She goes to work by bicycle every day.

                  C) She walks to work on rainy days.

                  D) She always goes to work on foot.

                  8. A) In a barbershop.

                  B) In a supermarket.

                  C) In a bank.

                  D) In a restaurant.

                  9. A) Husband and wife.

                  B) Doctor and patient.

                  C) Neighbors.

                  D) Employer and employee.

                  10. A) She planted trees.

                  B) She saw the panda.

                  C) She taught her roommates how to play Chinese chess.

                  D) She learned to play Chinese chess.

                  Section B

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear a short passage. At the end of the passage, you will hear two questions. Both the passage and the questions will be spoken twice. After you hear a question, you must choose the best answer from the four choices marked A),B),C) and D. Then mark the corresponding letter on the Answer Sheet with a single line through the center.

                  Questions 11 to 12 are based on the passage you have just heard.

                  11. A) You must tell your new friend your telephone number at your first meeting.

                  B) You shouldn’t talk about business on your first meeting with your new friend.

                  C) It’s quite common to give information about your family or your work.

                  D)You don’t have the right to end the conversation.

                  12. A) How to make new friends

                  B) The three parts of the first conversation with a new friend.

                  C) The importance of talking with a stranger in English

                  D) How to maintain friendship

                  Section C

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear a passage three times. Listen during the first reading. Then listen to carefully the passage again. When it is being read the second time, you should fill in the six blanks numbered form S1 to S6 with the exact words or phrases you have just heard. Finally, when the passage is read for the third time, you should check what you have written.

                  Dreams are expressions of thoughts, feelings and events that pass through our mind while we are sleeping. People dream about one to two hours each night. We may have four to seven dreams in one night. Everybody dreams. But only some people S1____________ their dreams.

                  The word "dream" comes from an old word in English that means "S2____________" and "music." Our dreams often include all the senses – smells, sounds, S3____________ , tastes and things we touch. We dream in S4____________. Sometimes we dream the same dream over and over again. These repeated dreams are often unpleasant. They may even be nightmares -- bad dreams that S5____________ us.

                  Artists, writers and scientists sometimes say they get ideas from dreams. For example, the singer Paul McCartney of the Beatles said he awakened one day with the music for the song "Yesterday" in his head. The writer Mary Shelley said she had a very strong dream about a scientist using a machine to make a S6____________ come alive. When she awakened, she began to write her book about a scientist named Frankenstein who creates a frightening monster.

                  大學英語三級全真模擬聽力試題(四)

                  Test Four

                  Section A

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear 10 short conversations. At the end of each conversation, a question will be asked about what was said. Both the conversation and the question will be spoken only once. After each question there will be a pause. During the pause, you must choose the best answer from the four choices marked A), B), C) and D.. Then mark the corresponding letter on the Answer Sheet with a single line through the center.

                  Example: You will hear: Where do you think the conversation most provably took place?

                  You will read:

                  A) At the office.

                  B) In the waiting room.

                  C) At the airport.

                  D) In a restaurant.

                  From the conversation we know that the two were talking about some work they had to finish in the evening. This is most likely to have taken place at the office. Therefore, A) “At the office” is the best answer. You should choose [A] on the Answer Sheet and mark it with a single line through the center.

                  Sample Answer [A] [B] [C] [D]

                  1. A) Turn the PC off. B) Leave the house.

                  C) Play badminton. D) Finish his computer program.

                  2. A) Ping Pong balls. B) Golf balls.

                  C) Basketballs. D) Footballs.

                  3. A) Eating out. B) Buying birthday presents.

                  C) Changing clothes. D) Having a rest.

                  4. A) She wants to have a break. B) She wants to take some time off.

                  C) She wants to leave on time. D) She wants to continue.

                  5. A) He couldn’t see the performance clearly. B) He thought the performance was dull.

                  C) He found the clock didn’t tell the right time. D) He didn’t arrive in time for the

                  performance.

                  6. A) $47. B) $37.

                  C) $26. D) $11.

                  7. A) Teacher and student. B) Doctor and patient.

                  C) Mother and son. D) Husband and wife.

                  8. A) She is seldom absent. B) She is regularly absent.

                  C) She misses her school days. D) She doesn’t like school at all.

                  9. A) It’s warm. B) It’s cold.

                  C) It’s sunny. D) It’s cloudy.

                  10. A) It’s usually hard to borrow David’s car.

                  B) David is often willing to lend money to others.

                  C) David is willing to lend anything except his car to others.

                  D) When someone borrows David’s car, they should pay him.

                  Section B

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear a short passage. At the end of the passage, you will hear two questions. Both the passage and the questions will be spoken twice. After you hear a question, you must choose the best answer from the four choices marked A),B),C) and D. Then mark the corresponding letter on the Answer Sheet with a single line through the center.

                  Questions 11 to 12 are based on the passage you have just heard.

                  11. A) She didn’t have enough money.

                  B) She wanted to thank the doctor.

                  C) She thought that a purse was a better present than money.

                  D) Her son asked her to do that.

                  12. A) 5 pounds.

                  B) 50 pounds.

                  C) 250 pounds.

                  D) 500 pounds.

                  Section C

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear a passage three times. Listen during the first reading. Then listen to carefully the passage again. When it is being read the second time, you should fill in the six blanks numbered form S1 to S6 with the exact words or phrases you have just heard. Finally, when the passage is read for the third time, you should check what you have written.

                  What would happen if you were the only person left who spoke your language? Who would you share stories with, sing songs to, or S1____________ jokes with? Who would understand your names for local plants, animals and traditions? This is the example David Harrison and Gregory Anderson use to explain the situation of many people around the world whose local languages are disappearing Mr. Harrison and Mr. Anderson head Living Tongues, an organization that studies and S2____________ endangered languages.

                  Sometimes a language disappears S3____________ when the last person speaking it dies. Or, a local language might disappear more slowly. This happens when an official language is used more often and children stop learning the local language of their parents. This is not a new S4____________. Official languages often represent a form of control over a group of people.

                  Throughout history, the language spoken by a powerful group S5____________ across a civilization. The more powerful culture S6____________ respects the language and culture of smaller ethnic groups. So, smaller cultures lose their local language as the language of the culture in power becomes the stronger influence.

                  大學英語三級全真模擬聽力試題(五)

                  Test Five

                  Section A

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear 10 short conversations. At the end of each conversation, a question will be asked about what was said. Both the conversation and the question will be spoken only once. After each question there will be a pause. During the pause, you must choose the best answer from the four choices marked A), B), C) and D. Then mark the corresponding letter on the Answer Sheet with a single line through the center.

                  Example: You will hear: Where do you think the conversation most provably took place?

                  You will read:

                  A) At the office.

                  B) In the waiting room.

                  C) At the airport.

                  D) In a restaurant.

                  From the conversation we know that the two were talking about some work they had to finish in the evening. This is most likely to have taken place at the office. Therefore, A) “At the office” is the best answer. You should choose [A] on the Answer Sheet and mark it with a single line through the center.

                  Sample Answer [A] [B] [C] [D]

                  1. A) 15. B) 25.

                  C) 35. D) 45.

                  2. A) The man can handle the task by himself.

                  B) The woman reminds the man not to forget to ask Linda.

                  C) Linda will probably refuse to help the man.

                  D) The woman is quite willing to help the man.

                  3. A) On a train. B) On a bus.

                  C) On a plane. D) In a car.

                  4. A) It was a short but very good speech. B) It was a long but humorous speech.

                  C) It was too short. D) It was too long.

                  5. A) His biscuits. B) His desk.

                  C) The drawer. D) His pen.

                  6. A) Monday. B) Tuesday.

                  C) Wednesday. D) Thursday.

                  7. A) Flower. B) Water.

                  C) Sugar. D) Butter.

                  8 A) The man’s lawyer. B) The man’s wife.

                  C) The man’s teacher. D) The man’s boss.

                  9. A) She did not have enough money for the trip. B) She did not have enough time for the trip

                  C) She did not enjoy the trip. D) She hopes to take another trip soon.

                  10. A) Employer and employee. B) Mother and son.

                  C) Friends. D) Teacher and student.

                  Section B

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear a short passage. At the end of the passage, you will hear two questions. Both the passage and the questions will be spoken twice. After you hear a question, you must choose the best answer from the four choices marked A),B),C) and D. Then mark the corresponding letter on the Answer Sheet with a single line through the center.

                  Questions 11 to 12 are based on the passage you have just heard.

                  11. A) People only care about their own business

                  B) People are always ready to help each other

                  C) People live in very small areas

                  D) People give help to others in order to get something in return.

                  12. A) Life in cities and life in villages in the same country are almost the same.

                  B) There are not many people in the streets in the center of London on Sundays.

                  C) In large cities people seldom know what their neighbors have for lunch.

                  D)In an English village everybody knows everybody else.

                  Section C

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear a passage three times. Listen during the first reading. Then listen to carefully the passage again. When it is being read the second time, you should fill in the six blanks numbered form S1 to S6 with the exact words or phrases you have just heard. Finally, when the passage is read for the third time, you should check what you have written.

                  An estimated nine million people rock climb in the United States. Millions more take part in the activity around the world. Some do it just for S1____________satisfaction. Others S2____________. Rock climbing can be dangerous. But there are many methods and protective devices that can increase a climber"s safety.

                  Climbing takes strength, control and good S3____________. Climbers have to pull themselves S4____________ up the face of very high rocks or walls. So they have to be strong enough to carry their own weight. And climbers sometimes have to hold on to rocks by only their fingers or toes.

                  There are several kinds of rock climbing. Traditional rock climbing is done outside. Climbers wear ropes and attach devices to the rocks as they climb many hundreds of meters up. They also connect their ropes to the devices. If a climber slips, a rope can stop him from S5____________.

                  Sport climbing is similar. However, in those cases the protective devices are permanently placed in the rock. There is also S6____________ climbing. Rock walls made of wood or concrete have places for the climber"s hands and feet.

                  答案:

                  BDBAC BACDA DA experienced events Firstly reliable choose minute

                  CADAC BBADD BD separated while natural objects producing accepted

                  BCABA ACDAC CB remember joy sights color frighten creature

                  ABADB CCABA BC exchange protects immediately process spreads rarely

                  ACCBD AABCD BA personal compete balance straight falling indoor

                  大學英語三級試題及答案(7)

                  College English Band Three

                  Part Listening Comprehension

                  1. A) To cancel his trip. B) To go to bed early.

                  C) To catch a later flight. D) To ask for a wake-up call.

                  2. A) They have different opinions as to what to do next.

                  B) They have to pay for the house by installments.

                  C) They will fix a telephone in the bathroom.

                  D) The man’s attitude is more sensible than the woman’s.

                  3. A) She will save the stamps for the man’s sister. B) She will no longer get letters from Canada.

                  C) She can’t give the stamps to the man’s sister. D) She has given the stamps to the man’s roommates.

                  4. A) Visiting the Brownings. B) Writing a postcard.

                  C) Looking for a postcard. D) Filling in a form.

                  5. A) The man should work with somebody else. B) The man should meet his partner’s needs.

                  C) They should come to a compromise. D) They should find a better lab for the project.

                  6. A) She can’t finish her assignment, either. B) She can’t afford a computer right now.

                  C) The man can use her computer. D) The man should buy a computer right away.

                  7. A) The visiting economist has given several lectures.

                  B) The guest lecturer’s opinion is different from Dr. Johnson’s.

                  C) Dr. Johnson and the guest speaker were schoolmates.

                  D) Dr. Johnson invited the economist to visit their college.

                  8. A) She’s never watched a better game. B) Football is-her favorite pastime.

                  C) The game has been canceled. D) Their team played very badly.

                  9. A) The man should stick to what he’s doing. B) The man should take up a new hobby.

                  C) The man should stop playing tennis. D) The man should find the cause for his failure.

                  10. A) An invented story. B) A real life experience.

                  C) An imaginary situation. D) A terrible nightmare.

                  Section B

                  Passage 1

                  11. A) The name of a German town B) A resident of Frankfurt.

                  C) A kind of German sausage. D) A kind of German bread.

                  12. A) He sold fast food. B) He raised dogs.

                  C) He was A cook. D) He was a Cartoonist.

                  13. A) Because the Americans found they were from Germany.

                  B) Because people thought they contained dog meat.

                  C) Because people had to get used to their taste.

                  D) Because it was too hot to eat right away.

                  Passage 2

                  14. A) They give out faint cries. B) They make noises to drive away insects.

                  C) They extend their water pipes. D) They become elastic like rubber bands.

                  15. A) Quiet plants. B) Well-watered plants. C) Healthy plants. D) Thirsty plants.

                  16. A) They could drive the insects away. B) They could keep the plants well-watered.

                  C) They could make the plants grow faster. D) They could build devices to trap insects.

                  Passage 3

                  17. A) To look for a different lifestyle. B) To enjoy themselves.

                  C) For adventure. D) For education.

                  18. A) There are 200 vehicles for every kilometer of roadway. B) It has a dense population.

                  C) There are many museums and palaces. D) It has many towering buildings.

                  19. A) It is a city of contrasts. B) It possesses many historical sites.

                  C) It is an important industrial center. D) It has many big and beautiful parks.

                  20. A) It helps develop our personalities. B) It enables us to acquire first-hand knowledge.

                  C) It makes our life more interesting. D) It brings about changes in our lifestyle.

                  Part Cloze

                    There are many superstitions in Britain, but one of the most __ 31__ held is that it is unlucky to walk under a ladder even if it means __32__ the pavement into a busy street! __33__ you must pass under a ladder you can __34__ bad luck by crossing your fingers and __35__ them crossed until you have seen a dog. __36__ , you may lick your finger and __37__ a cross on the toe of your shoe, and not look again at the shoe until the __38__ has dried.

                    Another common __39__ is that it is unlucky to open an umbrella in the house-it will either bring __40__ to the person who opened it or to the whole __41__. Anyone opening an umbrella in fine weather is __42__, as it inevitably brings rain!

                    The number 13 is said to be unlucky for some, and when the 13th day of the month __43__ on a Friday, anyone wishing to avoid a bad event had better stay __44__. the worst misfortune that can happen to a person is caused by breaking a mirror, __45__ it brings seven years of bad luck! The superstition is supposed to __46__ in ancient times, when mirrors were considered to be tools of the gods.

                    Black cats are generally considered lucky in Britain, even though they are __47__ witchcraft…… it is __48__ lucky if a black cat crosses your path-although in America the exact opposite belief prevails.

                  Finally, a commonly held superstition is that of touching wood __49__ luck. This measure is most often taken if you think you have said something that is tempting fate, such as "my car has never __50__, touch wood?"

                  21.

                  A) broadly

                  B) widely

                  C) quickly

                  D) speedily

                  22.

                  A) running from

                  B) jumping off

                  C) stepping off

                  D) keeping from

                  23.

                  A) If

                  B) As

                  C) Though

                  D) Unless

                  24.

                  A) erase

                  B) remove

                  C) avoid

                  D) ease

                  25.

                  A) keep

                  B) keeping

                  C) kept

                  D) to keep

                  26.

                  A) Consequently

                  B) However

                  C) Comparatively

                  D) Alternatively

                  27.

                  A) make

                  B) print

                  C) perform

                  D) produce

                  28.

                  A) label

                  B) symbol

                  C) mark

                  D) cut

                  29.

                  A) argument

                  B) superstition

                  C) opinion

                  D) idea

                  30.

                  A) loss

                  B) difficulty

                  C) tragedy

                  D) misfortune

                  31.

                  A) house

                  B) household

                  C) home

                  D) circle

                  32.

                  A) unwise

                  B) unintelligent

                  C) unpopular

                  D) unfortunate

                  33.

                  A) falls

                  B) arrives

                  C) drops

                  D) happens

                  34.

                  A) away

                  B) outdoors

                  C) indoors

                  D) far

                  35.

                  A) when

                  B) as

                  C) if

                  D) though

                  36.

                  A) have originated

                  B) be originating

                  C) be originated

                  D) originate

                  37.

                  A) concerned about

                  B) related with

                  C) associated with

                  D) connected in

                  38.

                  A) especially

                  B) specially

                  C) frequently

                  D) rarely

                  39.

                  A) as

                  B) for

                  C) in

                  D) of

                  40.

                  A) broken up

                  B) broken off

                  C) broken away

                  D) broken down

                  Part Reading Comprehension

                  Text A

                    In the case of mobile phones, change is everything. Recent research indicates that the mobile phone is changing not only our culture, but our very bodies as well.

                    First, let"s talk about culture. The difference between the mobile phone and its parent, the fixed-line phone, you get whoever answers it.

                    This has several implications. The most common one, however, and perhaps the thing that has changed our culture forever, is the "meeting" influence. People no longer need to make firm plans about when and where to meet. Twenty years ago, a Friday night would need to be arranged in advance. You needed enough time to allow everyone to get from their place of work to the first meeting place. Now, however, a night out can be arranged on the run. It is no longer "see you there at 8", but "text me around 8 and we"ll see where we all are".

                    Texting changes people as well. In their paper, "insights into the Social and Psychological Effects of SMS Text Messaging", two British researchers distinguished between two types of mobile phone users: the "talkers" and the "texters"-those who prefer voice to text message and those who prefer text to voice.

                    They found that the mobile phone"s individuality and privacy gave texters the ability to express a whole new outer personality. Texters were likely to report that their family would be surprised if they were to read their texts. This suggests that texting allowed texters to present a self-image that differed from the one familiar to those who knew them well.

                    Another scientist wrote of the changes that mobiles have brought to body language. There are two kinds that people use while speaking on the phone. There is the "speakeasy": the head is held high, in a self-confident way, chatting away. And there is the "spacemaker": these people focus on themselves and keep out other people.

                    Who can blame them? Phone meetings get cancelled or reformed and camera-phones intrude on people"s privacy. So, it is understandable if your mobile makes you nervous. But perhaps you needn"t worry so much. After all, it is good to talk.

                  41. When people plan to meet nowadays, they________________.

                  A) arrange the meeting place beforehand   B) postpone fixing the place till last minute

                  C) seldom care about when and where to meet D) still love to work out detailed meeting plans.

                  42. According to the two British researchers, the social and psychological effect are mostly likely to be seen on__.

                  A) Talkers   B) the "speakeasy"  C) the "spacemaker"   D) texters

                  43. We can infer from the passage that the texts sent by texters are________.

                  A) quite revealing  B) well written   C) unacceptable by others  D) shocking to others

                  44. According to the passage, who is afraid of being heard while talking on the mobile?

                  A) talkers    B) the speakeasy   C) the spacemaker   D) texters

                  45. An appropriate title for the passage might be_________.

                  A) the SMS effect    B) cultural implication of mobile use

                   C) change in the use of the mobile   D) body language and the mobile phone!

                  Text B

                  Over the last 25 years, British society has changed a great deal-or at least many parts of it have. In some ways, however, very little has changed, particularly where attitudes are concerned. Ideas about social class-whether a person is "working-class" or "middle-class"-are one area in which changes have been extremely slow.

                    In the past, the working-class tended to be paid less than middle-class people, such as teachers and doctors. As a result of this and also of the fact that workers" jobs were generally much less secure, distinct differences in life-styles and attitudes came into existence. The typical working man would collect his wages on Friday evening and then, it was widely believed, having given his wife her "housekeeping", would go out and squander the rest on beer and betting.

                    The stereotype of what a middle-class man did with his money was perhaps nearer the truth. He was-and still is - inclined to take a longer-term view. Not only did he regard buying a house of these provided him and his family with security. Only in very few cases did workers have the opportunity (or the education and training) to make such long-term plans.

                    Nowadays, a great deal has changed. In a large number of cases factory workers earn as much, if not more, than their middle-class supervisors. Social security and laws to improve century, have made it less necessary than before to worry about "tomorrow". Working-class people seem slowly to be losing the feeling of inferiority they had in the past. In fact there has been a growing tendency in the past few years for the middle-classes to feel slightly ashamed of their position.

                    The changes in both life-styles and attitudes are probably most easily seen amongst younger people. They generally tend to share very similar tastes in music and clothes, they spend their money in having a good time, and save for holidays or longer-term plans when necessary. There seems to be much less difference than in precious generations. Nevertheless, we still have a wide gap between the well-paid (whatever the type of job they may have) and the low-paid. As long as this gap exists, there will always be a possibility that new conflicts and jealousies will emerge, or rather that the old conflicts will re-appear, but between different groups.

                  46. Which of the following is seen as the cause of class differences in the past?

                  A) Life style and occupation   B) Attitude and income

                   C) income and job security   D) job security and hobbies

                  47. The writer seems to suggest that the description of ___________ is closer to truth.

                  A) middle -class ways of spending money   B) working-class ways of spending the weekend

                   C) working-class drinking habits  D) middle-class attitudes

                  48. According to the passage, which of the following is not a typical feature of the middle -class?

                  A) desiring for security   B) Making long term plans

                   C) having priorities in life   D) saving money

                  49. Working -class people"s sense of security increased as a result of all the following factors except?

                  A) better social security   B) more job opportunities

                  C) higher living standard  D) better legal protection.

                  50 Which of the following statement is incorrect?

                  A) Changes are slowly taking place in all sectors of the British society.

                  B) The gap between working -class and middle- class young people is narrowing

                  C) Different in income will remain but those in occupation will disappear

                  D) middle-class people may sometimes feel inferior to working-class people!

                  Text C

                  For several days I saw little of Mr. Rochester. In the morning, he seemed much occupied with business, and in the afternoon gentlemen from the neighborhood called and some times stayed to dine with him. When his foot was well enough, he rode out a great deal.

                    During this time, all my knowledge of him was limited to occasional meetings about the house, when he would sometimes pass me coldly, and sometimes bow and smile. His changes of manner did not offend me, because I saw that I had nothing to do with the cause of them.

                    One evening, several days later, I was invited to talk to Mr. Rochester after dinner. He was sitting in his armchair, and looked not quite so severe, and much less gloomy. There was a smile on his lips, and his eyes were bright, probably with wine. As I was looking at him, he suddenly turned, and asked me, "do you think I"m handsome, Miss Eyre?"

                    The answer somehow slipped from my tongue before I realized it: "No, sir."

                    "Ah, you really are unusual! You are a quiet, serious little person, but you can be almost rude."

                    "Sir, I"m sorry. I should have said that beauty doesn"t matter, or something like that,"

                    "No, you shouldn"t! I see, you criticize my appearance, and then you stab me in the back! You have honesty and feeling. There are not many girls like you. But perhaps I go too fast. Perhaps you have awful faults to counterbalance your few good points

                    I thought to myself that he might have too. He seemed to read my mind, and said quickly," yes, you"re right. I have plenty of faults. I went the wrong way when I was twenty-one, and have never found the right path again. I might have been very different. I might have been as good as you, and perhaps wiser. I am not a bad man, take my word for it, but I have done wrong. It wasn"t my character, but circumstances which were to blame. Why do I tell you all this? Because you"re the sort of person people tell their problems and secrets to, because you"re sympathetic and give them hope."

                    It seemed he had quite a lot to talk to me. He didn"t seem to like to finish the talk quickly, as was the case for the first time.

                    "Don"t be afraid of me, Miss Eyre." He continued. “You don"t relax or laugh very much; perhaps because of the effect Lowood school has had on you. But in time, you will be more natural with me, and laugh, and speak freely. You"re like a bird in a cage. When you get out of the cage, you"ll fly very high. Good night.”

                  51. At the beginning Miss Eyre’s impressions of Mr. Rochester were all except__________.

                  A) busy B) sociable C) friendly D) changeable

                  52. In "……and all my knowledge him was limited to occasional meetings about the house…".the word about means______________.

                  A) around B) on C) outside D) concerning.

                  53. Why did Mr. Rochester say" …and then you stab me in the back!"

                  A) because Jane had intended to kill him with a knife  

                  B) because Jane had intended to be more critical.

                  C) because Jane had regretted having talked to him  

                  D) because Jane had said something else to correct herself.

                  54. From what Mr. Rochester told Miss Eyre, we can conclude that he wanted to__________.

                  A) Tell her all his troubles B) tell her his life experience.

                  C) change her opinion of him D) change his circumstances

                  55. At the end of the passage , Mr. Rochester sounded__________.

                  A) rude B) cold C) friendly D) encouraging.

                  Part Writing

                  Section A: Note-writing

                  Write a note about 50-60 words based on the following situation:

                  Lily, your roommate, is looking for a part-time job in the coming summer vacation. You saw an ad for a private English tutor for a schoolboy. Write her a note, telling her what the job is and strongly recommending it to her.

                  Section B: Will Tourism Bring Harm to the Environment?

                  You are to write in three parts.

                  In the first part, state specifically what your opinion is.

                  In the second part, provide one or two reasons to support your opinion.

                  In the last part, bring what you have written to a natural conclusion or make a summary.

                  大學英語三級試題及答案(8)

                  大學英語三級全真模擬聽力試題(一)

                  Test One

                  Part I: Listening Comprehension (15%)

                  Section A

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear 10 short conversations. At the end of each conversation, a question will be asked about what was said. Both the conversation and the question will be spoken only once. After each question there will be a pause. During the pause, you must choose the best answer from the four choices marked A), B), C) and D. Then mark the corresponding letter on the Answer Sheet with a single line through the center.

                  Example: You will hear: Where do you think the conversation most provably took place?

                  You will read:

                  A) At the office.

                  B) In the waiting room.

                  C) At the airport.

                  D) In a restaurant.

                  From the conversation we know that the two were talking about some work they had to finish in the evening. This is most likely to have taken place at the office. Therefore, A) “At the office” is the best answer. You should choose [A] on the Answer Sheet and mark it with a single line through the center.

                  Sample Answer [A] [B] [C] [D]

                  1. A) Fixing an engine. B) Repairing a car.

                  C) Cashing a check. D) Buying some wheels.

                  2. A) Visit Japan. B) Cook some food.

                  C) Travel abroad. D) Eat out.

                  3. A) One of a cheaper price. B) One of a different color.

                  C) One of a fashionable style. D) One of a smaller size.

                  4. A) He has changed his plan. B) He has canceled his trip.

                  C) He is arriving this afternoon. D) He forgot to arrange his trip.

                  5. A) They had lost their way. B) They were told it would rain.

                  C) They were caught in the rain. D) They had taken an umbrella.

                  6. A) They will take the bus at 11 o’clock.

                  B) The bus is late.

                  C) The bus has already arrived.

                  D) The woman thought the bus would arrive at 11:20.

                  7. A) The man shouldn’t drink either.

                  B) Drinking is better than smoking.

                  C) The man should switch to drinking.

                  D) The man could smoke a little.

                  8. A) In a bookstore.

                  B) At a museum

                  C) At a zoo.

                  D) On a college campus.

                  9. A) Teacher and student.

                  B) Shop assistant and customer.

                  C) Tourist and travel agent.

                  D) Husband and wife.

                  10. A) She will stop to take a rest.

                  B) She will work for three hours.

                  C) She will have her back checked.

                  D) She will buy a computer in three hours.

                  Section B

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear a short passage. At the end of the passage, you will hear two questions. Both the passage and the questions will be spoken twice. After you hear a question, you must choose the best answer from the four choices marked A),B),C) and D. Then mark the corresponding letter on the Answer Sheet with a single line through the center.

                  Questions 11 to 12 are based on the passage you have just heard.

                  11. A. There are only 23 hours in a day

                  B. There are 8 days in a week

                  C. There are one more hour in a day

                  D. All of the above

                  12. A. Set one hour ahead in each new time zone.

                  B. Set one hour ahead for the whole trip.

                  C. Set one full day back for the whole trip.

                  D. Set 12 hours back.

                  Section C

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear a passage three times. Listen during the first reading. Then listen to carefully the passage again. When it is being read the second time, you should fill in the six blanks numbered form S1 to S6 with the exact words or phrases you have just heard. Finally, when the passage is read for the third time, you should check what you have written.

                  Information has always been at the center of human communication. You may ask why. Well, communication between people involves giving and receiving information. The way we give and receive information today has S1____________ a revolution in the development of the mass media in the 20th century.

                  The first truly mass communication medium was the newspaper. For the first time in history, people could read about S2____________ in their country and from around the world every day. However, there were two problems with newspapers of that time. S3____________, newspapers were available only in large cities, for getting newspapers to the countryside was a difficult and time-consuming task. Secondly, newspapers weren"t always S4____________, as there was a limited range of opinions.

                  Nowadays, we can S5____________ from a wide variety of sources to get information. Television and the Internet have given us the chance to be informed about everything the S6_____________ it happens. Numerous radio and TV stations, satellite channels and millions of websites help people keep up with the latest news. People live history and are part of it.

                  大學英語三級全真模擬聽力試題(二)

                  Test Two

                  Section A

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear 10 short conversations. At the end of each conversation, a question will be asked about what was said. Both the conversation and the question will be spoken only once. After each question there will be a pause. During the pause, you must choose the best answer from the four choices marked A), B), C) and D. Then mark the corresponding letter on the Answer Sheet with a single line through the center.

                  Example: You will hear: Where do you think the conversation most provably took place?

                  You will read:

                  A) At the office.

                  B) In the waiting room.

                  C) At the airport.

                  D) In a restaurant.

                  From the conversation we know that the two were talking about some work they had to finish in the evening. This is most likely to have taken place at the office. Therefore, A) “At the office” is the best answer. You should choose [A] on the Answer Sheet and mark it with a single line through the center.

                  Sample Answer [A] [B] [C] [D]

                  1. A) Carol. B) Jim.

                  C) Paul. D) The woman.

                  2. A) 11:00. B) 11:30.

                  C) 12:00. D) 12:30.

                  3. A) 5. B) 12.

                  C) 14. D) 16.

                  4. A) Go to the post office. B) Go down the street.

                  C) Cross the street. D) Go to the cinema.

                  5. A) Denis. B) John.

                  C) Mary. D) The woman.

                  6. A)To get more advice. B)To get more exercise.

                  C)To get married. D)To get a job.

                  7. A) Mr. Johnson will be busy tomorrow morning.

                  B) Mr. Johnson will be busy tomorrow.

                  C).Tomorrow afternoon will be fine.

                  D) The man can meet Mr. Johnson the day after tomorrow.

                  8. A) A dentist. B) Her teacher.

                  C) Her brother. D) Her friends.

                  9. A) He’s a receptionist. B) He’s a tour guide.

                  C) He’s a shopkeeper. D) He’s an accountant.

                  10. A) At a theater. B) In a waiting room.

                  C) In a supermarket. D) In a restaurant.

                  Section B

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear a short passage. At the end of the passage, you will hear two questions. Both the passage and the questions will be spoken twice. After you hear a question, you must choose the best answer from the four choices marked A),B),C) and D. Then mark the corresponding letter on the Answer Sheet with a single line through the center.

                  Questions 11 to 12 are based on the passage you have just heard.

                  11. A) Teachers made children sit still for a long time.

                  B) Children must learn and discover things themselves.

                  C) Children had to repeat things till they could remember them.

                  D) School is like a prison to some children.

                  12. A) They haven’t learnt anything in school.

                  B) Their teachers don’t allow them to work.

                  C) Their parents don’t allow them to work

                  D) The law does not allow them to work.

                  Section C

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear a passage three times. Listen during the first reading. Then listen to carefully the passage again. When it is being read the second time, you should fill in the six blanks numbered form S1 to S6 with the exact words or phrases you have just heard. Finally, when the passage is read for the third time, you should check what you have written.

                  One way to think about time is to imagine a world without time. There could be no movement, because time and movement cannot be S1____________. A world without time could exist only as long as there were no changes. For time and change are linked. We know that time has passed when something changes.

                  In the real world -- the world with time -- changes never stop. Some changes happen only once in a S2____________; others happen repeatedly. Humans always have noted S3____________ events that repeat themselves. When people began to count such events, they began to measure time.

                  In early human history, the only changes that seemed to repeat themselves evenly were the movements of S4____________ in the sky. The most easily seen result of these movements was the difference between light and darkness.

                  The sun rises in the eastern sky, S5____________ light. It moves across the sky and sinks in the west, causing darkness. The appearance and disappearance of the sun was even and unfailing. The periods of light and darkness it created were the first S6____________ periods of time. We have named each period of light and darkness -- one day.

                  大學英語三級全真模擬聽力試題(三)

                  Test Three

                  Section A

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear 10 short conversations. At the end of each conversation, a question will be asked about what was said. Both the conversation and the question will be spoken only once. After each question there will be a pause. During the pause, you must choose the best answer from the four choices marked A), B), C) and D. Then mark the corresponding letter on the Answer Sheet with a single line through the center.

                  Example: You will hear: Where do you think the conversation most provably took place?

                  You will read:

                  A) At the office.

                  B) In the waiting room.

                  C) At the airport.

                  D) In a restaurant.

                  From the conversation we know that the two were talking about some work they had to finish in the evening. This is most likely to have taken place at the office. Therefore, A) “At the office” is the best answer. You should choose [A] on the Answer Sheet and mark it with a single line through the center.

                  Sample Answer [A] [B] [C] [D]

                  1. A) A policewoman.

                  B) A hotel clerk.

                  C) A waitperson.

                  D) A shop assistant.

                  2. A) The lady bought the desk lamp when she was in Hong Kong.

                  B) The lady bought the desk lamp in China last winter.

                  C) The lady’s friend got it on the Internet for her.

                  D) The lady’s friend bought it in China.

                  3. A) He didn’t attend the lecture.

                  B) He fell asleep on the train.

                  C) He caught the early train to attend the lecture.

                  D) The train broke down and he was late for the lecture.

                  4. A) 08:00.

                  B) 08:15.

                  C) 08:30.

                  D) 08:50.

                  5. A) His car key.

                  B) His overcoat

                  C) The sofa.

                  D) The table.

                  6. A) The man can’t swim.

                  B) The man can swim after he has done his homework.

                  C) The man can’t swim because he doesn’t know the way.

                  D) The man can swim if he knows the way.

                  7. A) She does not work on rainy days.

                  B) She goes to work by bicycle every day.

                  C) She walks to work on rainy days.

                  D) She always goes to work on foot.

                  8. A) In a barbershop.

                  B) In a supermarket.

                  C) In a bank.

                  D) In a restaurant.

                  9. A) Husband and wife.

                  B) Doctor and patient.

                  C) Neighbors.

                  D) Employer and employee.

                  10. A) She planted trees.

                  B) She saw the panda.

                  C) She taught her roommates how to play Chinese chess.

                  D) She learned to play Chinese chess.

                  Section B

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear a short passage. At the end of the passage, you will hear two questions. Both the passage and the questions will be spoken twice. After you hear a question, you must choose the best answer from the four choices marked A),B),C) and D. Then mark the corresponding letter on the Answer Sheet with a single line through the center.

                  Questions 11 to 12 are based on the passage you have just heard.

                  11. A) You must tell your new friend your telephone number at your first meeting.

                  B) You shouldn’t talk about business on your first meeting with your new friend.

                  C) It’s quite common to give information about your family or your work.

                  D)You don’t have the right to end the conversation.

                  12. A) How to make new friends

                  B) The three parts of the first conversation with a new friend.

                  C) The importance of talking with a stranger in English

                  D) How to maintain friendship

                  Section C

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear a passage three times. Listen during the first reading. Then listen to carefully the passage again. When it is being read the second time, you should fill in the six blanks numbered form S1 to S6 with the exact words or phrases you have just heard. Finally, when the passage is read for the third time, you should check what you have written.

                  Dreams are expressions of thoughts, feelings and events that pass through our mind while we are sleeping. People dream about one to two hours each night. We may have four to seven dreams in one night. Everybody dreams. But only some people S1____________ their dreams.

                  The word "dream" comes from an old word in English that means "S2____________" and "music." Our dreams often include all the senses – smells, sounds, S3____________ , tastes and things we touch. We dream in S4____________. Sometimes we dream the same dream over and over again. These repeated dreams are often unpleasant. They may even be nightmares -- bad dreams that S5____________ us.

                  Artists, writers and scientists sometimes say they get ideas from dreams. For example, the singer Paul McCartney of the Beatles said he awakened one day with the music for the song "Yesterday" in his head. The writer Mary Shelley said she had a very strong dream about a scientist using a machine to make a S6____________ come alive. When she awakened, she began to write her book about a scientist named Frankenstein who creates a frightening monster.

                  大學英語三級全真模擬聽力試題(四)

                  Test Four

                  Section A

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear 10 short conversations. At the end of each conversation, a question will be asked about what was said. Both the conversation and the question will be spoken only once. After each question there will be a pause. During the pause, you must choose the best answer from the four choices marked A), B), C) and D.. Then mark the corresponding letter on the Answer Sheet with a single line through the center.

                  Example: You will hear: Where do you think the conversation most provably took place?

                  You will read:

                  A) At the office.

                  B) In the waiting room.

                  C) At the airport.

                  D) In a restaurant.

                  From the conversation we know that the two were talking about some work they had to finish in the evening. This is most likely to have taken place at the office. Therefore, A) “At the office” is the best answer. You should choose [A] on the Answer Sheet and mark it with a single line through the center.

                  Sample Answer [A] [B] [C] [D]

                  1. A) Turn the PC off. B) Leave the house.

                  C) Play badminton. D) Finish his computer program.

                  2. A) Ping Pong balls. B) Golf balls.

                  C) Basketballs. D) Footballs.

                  3. A) Eating out. B) Buying birthday presents.

                  C) Changing clothes. D) Having a rest.

                  4. A) She wants to have a break. B) She wants to take some time off.

                  C) She wants to leave on time. D) She wants to continue.

                  5. A) He couldn’t see the performance clearly. B) He thought the performance was dull.

                  C) He found the clock didn’t tell the right time. D) He didn’t arrive in time for the

                  performance.

                  6. A) $47. B) $37.

                  C) $26. D) $11.

                  7. A) Teacher and student. B) Doctor and patient.

                  C) Mother and son. D) Husband and wife.

                  8. A) She is seldom absent. B) She is regularly absent.

                  C) She misses her school days. D) She doesn’t like school at all.

                  9. A) It’s warm. B) It’s cold.

                  C) It’s sunny. D) It’s cloudy.

                  10. A) It’s usually hard to borrow David’s car.

                  B) David is often willing to lend money to others.

                  C) David is willing to lend anything except his car to others.

                  D) When someone borrows David’s car, they should pay him.

                  Section B

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear a short passage. At the end of the passage, you will hear two questions. Both the passage and the questions will be spoken twice. After you hear a question, you must choose the best answer from the four choices marked A),B),C) and D. Then mark the corresponding letter on the Answer Sheet with a single line through the center.

                  Questions 11 to 12 are based on the passage you have just heard.

                  11. A) She didn’t have enough money.

                  B) She wanted to thank the doctor.

                  C) She thought that a purse was a better present than money.

                  D) Her son asked her to do that.

                  12. A) 5 pounds.

                  B) 50 pounds.

                  C) 250 pounds.

                  D) 500 pounds.

                  Section C

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear a passage three times. Listen during the first reading. Then listen to carefully the passage again. When it is being read the second time, you should fill in the six blanks numbered form S1 to S6 with the exact words or phrases you have just heard. Finally, when the passage is read for the third time, you should check what you have written.

                  What would happen if you were the only person left who spoke your language? Who would you share stories with, sing songs to, or S1____________ jokes with? Who would understand your names for local plants, animals and traditions? This is the example David Harrison and Gregory Anderson use to explain the situation of many people around the world whose local languages are disappearing Mr. Harrison and Mr. Anderson head Living Tongues, an organization that studies and S2____________ endangered languages.

                  Sometimes a language disappears S3____________ when the last person speaking it dies. Or, a local language might disappear more slowly. This happens when an official language is used more often and children stop learning the local language of their parents. This is not a new S4____________. Official languages often represent a form of control over a group of people.

                  Throughout history, the language spoken by a powerful group S5____________ across a civilization. The more powerful culture S6____________ respects the language and culture of smaller ethnic groups. So, smaller cultures lose their local language as the language of the culture in power becomes the stronger influence.

                  大學英語三級全真模擬聽力試題(五)

                  Test Five

                  Section A

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear 10 short conversations. At the end of each conversation, a question will be asked about what was said. Both the conversation and the question will be spoken only once. After each question there will be a pause. During the pause, you must choose the best answer from the four choices marked A), B), C) and D. Then mark the corresponding letter on the Answer Sheet with a single line through the center.

                  Example: You will hear: Where do you think the conversation most provably took place?

                  You will read:

                  A) At the office.

                  B) In the waiting room.

                  C) At the airport.

                  D) In a restaurant.

                  From the conversation we know that the two were talking about some work they had to finish in the evening. This is most likely to have taken place at the office. Therefore, A) “At the office” is the best answer. You should choose [A] on the Answer Sheet and mark it with a single line through the center.

                  Sample Answer [A] [B] [C] [D]

                  1. A) 15. B) 25.

                  C) 35. D) 45.

                  2. A) The man can handle the task by himself.

                  B) The woman reminds the man not to forget to ask Linda.

                  C) Linda will probably refuse to help the man.

                  D) The woman is quite willing to help the man.

                  3. A) On a train. B) On a bus.

                  C) On a plane. D) In a car.

                  4. A) It was a short but very good speech. B) It was a long but humorous speech.

                  C) It was too short. D) It was too long.

                  5. A) His biscuits. B) His desk.

                  C) The drawer. D) His pen.

                  6. A) Monday. B) Tuesday.

                  C) Wednesday. D) Thursday.

                  7. A) Flower. B) Water.

                  C) Sugar. D) Butter.

                  8 A) The man’s lawyer. B) The man’s wife.

                  C) The man’s teacher. D) The man’s boss.

                  9. A) She did not have enough money for the trip. B) She did not have enough time for the trip

                  C) She did not enjoy the trip. D) She hopes to take another trip soon.

                  10. A) Employer and employee. B) Mother and son.

                  C) Friends. D) Teacher and student.

                  Section B

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear a short passage. At the end of the passage, you will hear two questions. Both the passage and the questions will be spoken twice. After you hear a question, you must choose the best answer from the four choices marked A),B),C) and D. Then mark the corresponding letter on the Answer Sheet with a single line through the center.

                  Questions 11 to 12 are based on the passage you have just heard.

                  11. A) People only care about their own business

                  B) People are always ready to help each other

                  C) People live in very small areas

                  D) People give help to others in order to get something in return.

                  12. A) Life in cities and life in villages in the same country are almost the same.

                  B) There are not many people in the streets in the center of London on Sundays.

                  C) In large cities people seldom know what their neighbors have for lunch.

                  D)In an English village everybody knows everybody else.

                  Section C

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear a passage three times. Listen during the first reading. Then listen to carefully the passage again. When it is being read the second time, you should fill in the six blanks numbered form S1 to S6 with the exact words or phrases you have just heard. Finally, when the passage is read for the third time, you should check what you have written.

                  An estimated nine million people rock climb in the United States. Millions more take part in the activity around the world. Some do it just for S1____________satisfaction. Others S2____________. Rock climbing can be dangerous. But there are many methods and protective devices that can increase a climber"s safety.

                  Climbing takes strength, control and good S3____________. Climbers have to pull themselves S4____________ up the face of very high rocks or walls. So they have to be strong enough to carry their own weight. And climbers sometimes have to hold on to rocks by only their fingers or toes.

                  There are several kinds of rock climbing. Traditional rock climbing is done outside. Climbers wear ropes and attach devices to the rocks as they climb many hundreds of meters up. They also connect their ropes to the devices. If a climber slips, a rope can stop him from S5____________.

                  Sport climbing is similar. However, in those cases the protective devices are permanently placed in the rock. There is also S6____________ climbing. Rock walls made of wood or concrete have places for the climber"s hands and feet.

                  答案:

                  BDBAC BACDA DA experienced events Firstly reliable choose minute

                  CADAC BBADD BD separated while natural objects producing accepted

                  BCABA ACDAC CB remember joy sights color frighten creature

                  ABADB CCABA BC exchange protects immediately process spreads rarely

                  ACCBD AABCD BA personal compete balance straight falling indoor

                  大學英語三級試題及答案(9)

                  英語三級考試試題及答案

                  【篇一:英語三級考試真題】

                  題及答案

                  part ii structure (15 minutes)

                  directions: this part is to test your ability to construct grammatically correct sentences. it consists of 2 sections.

                  section a

                  directions: in this section, there are 10 incomplete sentences. you are required to complete each one by deciding on the most appropriate word or words from the 4 choices marked a), b), c) and d). then you should mark the corresponding letter on the answer sheet with a single line through the center.

                  16. we must find a way to cut prices ________ reducing our profits too much.

                  a) without

                  b) despite

                  c) with

                  d) for

                  17. she didn’t know ________ to express her ideas in english clearly in public.

                  a) which

                  b) why

                  c) what

                  d) how

                  18. ________ the weather improves, we will suffer a huge loss in the tourist industry.

                  a) as

                  b) since

                  c) while

                  d) unless

                  19. we are happy at the good news ________ mr. black has been awarded the best manager.

                  a) that

                  b) which

                  c) what

                  d) whether

                  20. it is important that we ________ the task ahead of time.

                  a) will fish

                  b) finished

                  c) finish

                  d) shall finish

                  21. would you please pass me the book ________ cover is black?

                  a) which

                  b) whose

                  c) that

                  d) its

                  22. ________ in the company for three years, mark has become experienced in business negotiations.

                  a) having worked

                  b) have been working

                  c) have worked

                  d) worked

                  23. not until she arrived at the meeting room ________ she had forgotten to bring the document.

                  a) she realized

                  b) did she realize

                  c) she did realize

                  d) does she realize

                  24. john had never been abroad before, ________ he found the business trip very exciting.

                  a) because

                  b) though

                  c) so

                  d) while

                  25. ________ some students are able to find employment after graduation, others will have to return to school and earn an advanced degree.

                  a) since

                  b) while

                  c) because

                  d) if

                  section b

                  directions: there are 10 incomplete statements here. you should fill in each blank with the proper form of the word given in brackets. write the word or words in the corresponding space on the answer sheet.

                  26. employees are not allowed (make) ________ personal phone calls in the office.

                  27. the shop assistant priced the goods before (put) ________ them on the shelf.

                  28. the purpose of new technology is to make life (easy) ________, not to make it more difficult.

                  29. the proposal about the annual sales (discuss) ________ at the next board meeting.

                  30. since we work in different sections of the company, we see each other only (occasional) ________.

                  31. some domestic manufacturers are busy increasing production, losing the chance to develop more (advance) ________ technology.

                  32. i shall appreciate your effort in (correct) ________ this error in my bank account as soon as possible.

                  33. if your neighbors are too noisy, then you have a good reason to make your (complain) ________.

                  34. 30 percent of the students who (interview) ________ yesterday believe they should continue with their education until they have a university degree.

                  35. measures should be taken to avoid the negative effect (bring) ________ about by unfair competition.

                  答案:16-20:addac 21-25:babcb

                  26. to make 27. putting 28. easier

                  29. will be discussed / is to be discussed / should be discussed

                  30. occasionally 31. advanced 32. correcting

                  33. complaint 34. were interviewed 35. brought

                  part iii reading comprehension (40 minutes)

                  directions: this part is to test your reading ability. there are 5 tasks for you to fulfill. you should read the reading materials carefully and do the tasks as you are instructed.

                  task 1

                  directions: after reading the following passage, you will find 5 questions or unfinished statements, numbered 36 to 40. for each question or statement there are 4 choices marked a), b),

                  c) and d). you should make the correct choice and mark the corresponding letter on the answer sheet with a single line through the center.

                  google, the internet search-engine company, has announced it will give more than twenty-five million dollars in money and investments to help the poor. the company says the effort involves using the power of information and technology to help people improve their lives. aleem walji works for google.org -- the part of the company that gives money to good causes. he said the company’s first project will help identify where

                  infectious (傳染性的) diseases are developing. in southeast asia and africa, for example, google.org will work with partners to strengthen early-warning systems and take action against growing health threats.

                  google.org’s second project will invest in ways to help small and medium-sized businesses grow. walji says microfinance (小額信貸) is generally small, short-term loans that create few jobs. instead, he says google.org wants to develop ways to bring investors and business owners together to create jobs and improve economic growth.

                  google.org will also give money to help two climate-change programs announced earlier this year. one of these programs studies ways to make renewable (再生的) energy less costly than coal-based energy. the other is examining the efforts being made to increase the use of electric cars.

                  the creators of google have promised to give google.org about one percent of company profits and one percent of its total stock value every year. aleem walji says this amount may increase in the future.

                  36. the purpose of google’s investments is to ________.

                  a) help poor people

                  b) develop new technology

                  c) expand its own business

                  d) increase the power of information

                  37. according to aleem walji, the company’s first project is to ________.

                  a) set up a new system to warn people of infectious diseases

                  b) find out where infectious diseases develop

                  c) identify the causes of infectious diseases

                  d) cure patients of infectious diseases

                  38. what kind of businesses will benefit from google.org’s second project?

                  a) large enterprises

                  b) cross-national companies

                  c) foreign-funded corporations

                  d) small and medium-sized businesses

                  39. from the fourth paragraph, we learn that google’s money is also invested to help ________.

                  a) start more research programs

                  b) make more advanced electric cars

                  c) develop renewable and coal-based energy

                  d) conduct studies related to climate changes

                  40. from the last paragraph we learn that the investments by google.org come from ________.

                  a) google’s profits and stock value

                  b) some international it companies

                  c) the company’s own interests

                  d) local commercial banks

                  task 2

                  directions: this task is the same as task 1. the 5 questions or unfinished statements are numbered 41 to 45.

                  your boss holds your future prospects in his hands. some bosses are hard to get along with. some have excellent qualifications but no idea when it comes to dealing with people. of course, not all bosses are like that.

                  the relationship you have with your boss can be a major factor in determining your rise up the career ladder. your boss is not only your leader, he is also the person best equipped to help you do the job you are paid to do. he can inform you of company direction that may affect your professional development.

                  your boss also needs you to perform at your best in order to accomplish his objectives. he needs your feedback in order to provide realistic and useful reports to upper management. but how does this help you establish a meaningful working relationship with your boss?

                  the key is communication. learn and understand his goals and priorities (優先的事). observe and understand your boss’s work style. if he has not been clear with his expectations, ask! likewise, ask for feedback and accept criticism gracefully. and if he understands that you do not view your job as just something to fill the hours between 9 and 5, he may be more likely to help you.

                  in short, getting along with your boss requires getting to know his likes and dislikes and learning to work with his personality and management style.

                  41. the main idea of the first paragraph is that ________.

                  a) bosses are hard to deal with

                  b) bosses have good character

                  c) bosses determine your career future

                  d) bosses must have similar personality

                  42. in the second paragraph, ―rise up the career ladder‖ (line 2) means ________.

                  a) going to work abroad

                  b) changing jobs frequently

                  c) being promoted in position

                  d) pursuing an advanced degree

                  43. in order to achieve his objectives, your boss expects that you will ________.

                  a) do your best in your work

                  b) show your management skills

                  c) get along with your colleagues

                  d) write reports to upper management

                  44. the most important factor for establishing a good working relationship with the boss is ________.

                  a) high expectations

                  b) quick feedback

                  c) frequent criticism

                  d) effective communication

                  45. the best title for the passage might be ________.

                  a) how to take care of your boss.

                  b) how to get along with your boss

                  c) how to accept your boss’s criticism

                  d) how to accomplish your boss’s objective

                  答案:36-40:abdda41-45:ccadb

                  task 3

                  directions: the following is an announcement. after reading it, you are required to complete the outline below it (no.46 to no.50). you should write your answers briefly (in no more than three words) on the answer sheet correspondingly.

                  we welcome you aboard the eastern flight and will do our best to make your trip comfortable and enjoyable.

                  for your safety and convenience

                  to begin the trip, we would like to draw your attention to some safety-related details. these are also explained on the instruction card in the seat pocket in front of you. seat belts must remain fastened while the ―fasten seatbelts‖ sign is on. it is advisable to keep them fastened at all times while seated. all flights are non-smoking. the use of mobile telephones is now allowed when the airplane is on the ground. during the flight the use of cd and dvd players is not allowed. for your entertainment

                  to help you enjoy your trip, we provide a range of newspapers. on our md-11 and boeing aircraft, we provide music and video programs. on airbus a 321/320/319, short videos are shown. meals and drinks

                  during most flights we serve you a tasty meal and drinks. beer, wine and other drinks are served free of charge. coffee, tea and juice are served free of charge on all domestic (國內的) flights. on domestic flights leaving before nine and on all flights to northern china, a snack is served.

                  eastern flight service

                  safety and convenience

                  1) seat belts: remain -46- while the ―fasten seatbelts‖ sign is on

                  2) smoking: not allowed on board

                  3) mobile phones: used only when the airplane is -47-

                  4) cd and dvd: not allowed to play -48-

                  entertainment provided

                  1) newspapers

                  2) music and -49- on md-11 and boeing aircraft

                  meals and drinks on board

                  1) meals served on most flights

                  【篇二:大學英語3級考試真題】

                  >一、聽力測試 (本大題滿分25分,每小題1分)

                  做題時,先將答案劃在試卷上。錄音內容結束后再將試卷上的答案轉涂到答題卡上。

                  第一節

                  聽下面的8段短對話。每段對話后有一個小題,從每小題a、b、c三個選項中選出一個最

                  佳答案。

                  聽每段對話只讀一遍。

                  1.what color skirt does linda like?

                  a. red.b. green.c. blue.

                  2. how is the weather now?

                  a. sunny. b. cloudy.c. rainy.

                  3. how did they spend their weekend?

                  a. they had a school trip.b. they cleaned up the street.c. they studied for a test.

                  4. where will peter go on vacation?

                  a. to canada. b. to australia. c. to japan.

                  5. what does mike’s father want him to be?

                  a. a soldier. b. a pilot.c. a doctor.

                  6. who will repair the bicycle?

                  a. bills brother. b. mrs. browns brother. c. bill.

                  7. how much is the jacket now?

                  a. 60 dollars. b. 90 dollars. c. 120 dollars.

                  8. what do we know about jenny from the conversation?

                  a. she is worried about a coming test. b. she is working hard at physics.

                  c. she didnt pass the recent test.

                  第二節

                  下面你將聽到5段對話或獨白。每段對話或獨白后有幾個小題,從每小題a、b、c三個選

                  項中,選出一個與你聽到的對話或獨白內容相符的問題的答案。對話或獨白讀兩遍。

                  聽第一段材料回答9至11小題。

                  a. two. b. three. c. four.

                  10. what is the restaurant famous for?

                  a. noodles. b. chicken soup.c. dumplings.

                  11. what would they like to drink?

                  a. fish soup. b. beer and coke.c. milk.

                  聽第二段材料回答第12至14小題。

                  12. have the speaker ever seen each other?

                  a. yes, they have.b. no, they havent. c. we dont know.

                  13. how often does lucy play tennis?

                  a. twice a week. b. every morning. c. never.

                  14. when may they meet again?

                  a. next morning. b. next weekend. c. next weekday.

                  聽第三段材料回答第15至17小題。

                  15. whats the relationship (關系) between the two speakers?

                  a. friends.b. teacher and student. c. father and daughter

                  16. who is tom?

                  a. the mans neighbor. b. marys son. c. marys husband.

                  17. why doesnt steve go to school today?

                  a. he is ill. b. it is sunday today.c. he doesnt like school.

                  聽第四段材料回答第l8至20小題。

                  18. what does the man want to learn?

                  a. english. b. japanese. c. french.

                  19. how long does the course last?

                  a. 20 days. b. 26 days. c. 30 days.

                  20. when do the final exam begin?

                  a. on august 21st. b. on august 23rd. c. on july 31st.

                  聽第五段材料回答第21至25小題。

                  21. why couldnt john and alice find out who sent them the tickets?

                  a. the letter was lostb. there was no letter with the tickets.

                  c. their friends wanted to keep it a secret.

                  22. what did john and alice do after they got the tickets?

                  a. they went to see the play. b. they gave the tickets to their friends.

                  c. they thanked the people who sent them the tickets.

                  23. how did they feel when they were in the theater?

                  a. relaxed. b. surprised.c. worried.

                  24. how long were they probably away from home that evening?

                  a. eleven hours.b. two hours and a half.c. more than three hours.

                  25. who do you think sent them the tickets?

                  a. their best friends. b. the thieves. c. the people in the play.

                  二、選擇填空(本大題滿分30分,每小題1分)

                  從各小題a、b、c、d四個選項中,選出一個可以填入空白處的最佳選項,并在答題卡上

                  將該項涂黑。

                  26. -what does your father do, lily?

                  -he is _________. his job is to make sure that drivers obey the traffic roles.

                  a. an actor b. a policeman c. a waiter d. a reporter

                  27. -your room is very dirty. you should keep it _________.

                  -ok. ill sweep it tight away.

                  a. clean b. dry c. quietd. warm

                  28. -why dont you buy the computer?

                  -its too expensive. i cant _________ it.

                  a. afford b. sell c. borrowd. keep

                  29. -can you understand me?

                  -sorry. i can _________ understand what youve said.

                  a. nearlyb. easily c. hardly d. exactly

                  30. -what does your father think of your school report this term?

                  -the smile on his face shows he is _________ what i did in my study.

                  a. worried about b. sorry for c. angry withd. pleased with

                  31. -why did you come back so early today?

                  -the english party was _________ till next friday.

                  a. put up b. put offc. put out d. put down

                  32. -i have a problem. i dont know what to do.

                  -lets ask dick for help. he can _________a good idea to solve your problem.

                  a. think upb. give up c. hang out d. laugh at

                  33. -did liu ying and liu li come to your birthday puny, tina?

                  -i had invited them, but _________ of them showed up.

                  a. both b. all c. none d. neither

                  34. -helen, can i wear jeans and a t-shirt to the school talent show?

                  -ok, but a dress might be_________.

                  a. good b. badc. better d. worse

                  35. -have you washed the clothes?

                  -not yet. but i _________ them in half an hour.

                  a. washed b. have washedc. will wash d. wash

                  36. -why was he late for school yesterday?

                  -he overslept. by the time he got to the bus stop, the bus _________ already _________.

                  a. was, leaving b. has, leftc. would, leave d. had, left

                  37. -_________ fine day! shall we go for a walk?

                  -that sounds great!

                  a. whatb. how c. what a d. how a

                  38. -do you prefer classical music _________ pop music?

                  -pop music, i think.

                  a. to b. or c. thand. for

                  39. -its difficult for village children to cross the river to school.

                  -i think a bridge _________ over the river.

                  a. should be builtb. will build c. is built d. was built

                  40. -could you tell me _________?

                  -he rides his bike.

                  a. how does he go to work b. how he goes to work

                  c. what does he dod. where he goes

                  41. come on,_________ youll be late.

                  a. and b. butc. or d. so

                  42. i cant eat any more food, i am________.

                  a. busy b. hungry c. fulld. serious

                  43. i hated my new school at first, but i made lots of friends and now i _________ it.

                  a. get b. take c. fitd. love

                  44. --where did you go for your winter vacation?

                  --my family went to paris. ________ had a great time.

                  a. heb. shec. we d. they

                  45. ive decided to go to london next weekend. i was wondering ______ you could go

                  with me.

                  a. ifb. whenc. that d. where

                  46. the work is too hard for him. he _______ finish it on time.

                  a. cantb. mustnt c. shouldnt d. neednt

                  47. --can i help you?

                  --_________ . i want to buy some t-shirts for my children.

                  a. yes, please b. no, thanks c. it doesnt matter d. of course i can

                  48. mary isnt here at the moment. she _______ later.

                  a. comesb. came c. has comed. is coming

                  49. --would you like to play basketball with us this afternoon?

                  -- ______________ . i have to study for tomorrows test.

                  a. id love to b. im afraid not c. sounds goodd. no problem

                  50. harriet is lost and her parents are really _______ her.

                  a. interested inb. afraid of c. busy withd. worried about

                  51. im now in new york with my friend jenny. we ______ by plane on monday.

                  a. arriveb. arrived c. are arriving d. will arrive

                  52. the doctor told me to eat more _______ because its good for my health.

                  a. orange b. vegetables c. ice creamd. fish

                  53. how kind you are! you always do what you can_________ me.

                  a. help b. helping c. to helpd. helps

                  54. the paper is made _________ wood and the desk is also made _________ wood.

                  a. of, from b. of, of c. from, of d. in, of

                  55. --what happened to billy?

                  --he __ because of his drink-driving.

                  a. is caughtb. was caught c. has caught d. had caught

                  三、閱讀理解 (本大題滿分22分,每小題2分) 閱讀下面三篇材料,并根據材料內容從各

                  題所給的a、b、c、d四個選項中,選出一個最佳選項,并在答題卡上將該項涂黑。

                  a

                  dear emma,

                  your problem is like a circle. the harder you study, the less time you have to make friends

                  and the less friendly you look to your classmates. the fewer friends you have, the harder you

                  study to make yourself feel better.

                  try to break this bad circle. perhaps you are afraid of meeting new people, because you are too

                  shy or too serious. you are not. everyone has a fun side to his character. posh your shy side away

                  and show your classmates how much fun you can be.

                  look at your classmates. are there any people with whom you feel you have a lot in

                  common?

                  first, smile at your classmates. do this as often as you can, until your classmates become

                  used to your smiles and smile in return.

                  next, talk to your classmates. do this between classes or during your lunch break. you may

                  find it easier to start by talking to people when they are alone.

                  perhaps you could ask a classmate about your studies. they are likely to respond (回應) in a

                  very positive way. people like to feel important and helpful.

                  there must be someone else in your class who is also quiet. it might be easier to try to talk with

                  him or her. your problem is mainly about confidence. smile first, talk next and slowly you will

                  make friends. once you have more confidence, you can make as many friends as you want.

                  editor

                  56. the cause (原因) of emmas problem might be that .

                  a. her classmates dont like herb. she doesnt like her classmates

                  c. she doesnt like to feel important and helpfuld. she spends all her time on her study

                  57. the editor suggests emma should talk to someone else in her class who is also quiet because _________.

                  a. it might be easier to try to talk with him or her

                  b. he or she is likely to respond in a very positive way

                  c. he or she is always full of confidence

                  d. he or she likes smiling at her

                  58. the editor mainly tells emma about how to.

                  a. talk to classmatesb. make friendsc. improve her study d. be confident b

                  zhang lili, a chinese language teacher at no, 19 middle school of jiamusi in northeast chinas heilongjiang province, has recently been considered the most beautiful teacher in china. at 8:38 pm on tuesday, may 8th. 2012, zhang lili and her several students were crossing a road when suddenly an out-of-control school bus rushed towards them. without any hesitation (猶豫), she pushed two students out of the way, but she was then run over and her own legs were found under the wheels. the 29-year-old teacher lost her legs.

                  jin yanping, vice head teacher of no. 19 middle school, jiamusi city, said, she is a backbone teacher in our school. shes also the most popular teacher among the students. for the students, she is a sister. they call her beautiful sister.

                  but zhang lili is more than a teacher and sister to the 53 students ha her class. she cares about their studies and even their lives.

                  a students parent said, she is very warm-hearted. my son has lost his father. every month, the teacher gives him 100 yuan to buy books, with her own salary (工資).

                  but, for her family, anxiously waiting outside the icu room, they just want her to live.

                  li ziye, zhang lilis husband, said, all our family want her to five, then we can conquer (克服) any difficulty, as long as our family is complete.

                  zhang lilis deeds (事跡) drew wide attention from the country. shes been considered the most beautiful teacher in china.

                  59. zhang lili was hit and run over by a bus while she was .

                  a. taking a walk with her family on the road b. saving her students on the road

                  c. caring about her students studies d. giving the boy 100 yuan to buy books

                  60. the underlined word backbone in this passage means in chinese.

                  a. 分水嶺 b. 中樞 c. 骨干 d. 脊椎

                  61. from this report we know.

                  a. there was no driver in the bus

                  b. zhang lilis family didnt know she was hurt

                  c. zhang lili was pushed to the safe place by the students

                  d. zhang lili is a brave, kind and excellent teacher

                  (c)

                  a group of swans (天鵝) flew down to a beach where a crow (烏鴉) was jumping around . the crow watched them with disdain (鄙視).

                  “you have no flying skills at all ! ” he said to the swans. “ all you can do is to move your wings. can you turn over in the air ? no , that’s beyond you. let’s have a flying compitition. i’ll show you what real flying is ! ”

                  【篇三:大學英語三級b級考試真題+答案】

                  ss=txt>part i listening comprehension ( 15 minutes)

                  directions: this part is to test your listening ability .it consists of 3 sections.

                  section a

                  directions: this section is to test your ability to give proper responses. there are 5 recorded questions in it. after each question, there is a pause. the questions will be spoken two times. when you hear a question, you should decide on the correct answer from the 4 choices marked a),b),c) and d) given in your test paper. then you should mark the corresponding letter on the answer sheet with a single line through the center.

                  example: you will hear:

                  you will read:

                  a) i’m not sure.

                  b) you’re right.

                  c) yes, certainly.

                  d) that’s interesting.

                  from the question we learn that the speaker is asking the listener to leave a message. therefore, c) yes, certainly i

                  s the correct answer. you should mark c) on the answer sheet.

                  [a] [b] [c] [d]

                  now the test will begin.

                  1.

                  a)just a moment,please.

                  b)fine,thank you.

                  c)see you.

                  d)well done.

                  2.

                  a)glad to meet you.

                  b)yes,please.

                  c)it may not last long.

                  d)in twenty minutes.

                  3.

                  a)yes,please.

                  b)on monday.

                  c) i see.

                  d)good-bye.

                  4.

                  a)no problem.

                  b)many times.

                  c)i don’t know.

                  d)my pleasure.

                  5.

                  a)you are welcome.

                  b)he’s nice.

                  c)it’s perfect.

                  d)it’s two o’clock.

                  section b

                  directions: this section is to test your ability to understand short dialogues. there are 5 recorded dialogues in it. after each dialogue, there is a recorded question. both the dialogues and questions will be spoken two times. when you hear a question, you should decide on the correct answer from the 4 choices marked a),

                  b), c) and d) given in your test paper. then you should mark the corresponding letter on the answer sheet with a single line through the center.

                  6. a)he’s got a headache.

                  b)he can’t sleep at night.

                  c)he coughs a lot.

                  d)he doesn’t feel like eating.

                  7. a)have some food.

                  b)clean the table.

                  c)make a phone call.

                  d)buy a dictionary.

                  8. a)the sales manager.

                  b)the information officer.

                  c)the office secretary.

                  d)the chief engineer.

                  9. a)teacher and student.

                  b)manager and secretary.

                  c)police officer and driver.

                  d)husband and wife.

                  10.a)asking the way.

                  b)buying a ticket.

                  c)checking in at the airport.

                  d)booking a room.

                  section c

                  directions: in this section you will hear a recorded short passage. the passage is printed in the test paper, but with some words or phrases missing. the passage will be read three times. during the second reading, you are required to put the missing words or phrases on the answer sheet in order of the numbered blanks according to what you hear. the third reading is for you to check your writing. now the passage will begin.

                  ladies and gentlemen,

                  it’s a great pleasure to have you visit us today.i’m very happy to have the opportunity to 11 our company to you.

                  the company was established in l950.we mainly manufacture electronic goods and 12 them all over the over the world)our sales were about $100 million last year,and our business is growing steadily.

                  we have offices in asia,13 and europe.we have about l,000 employees,who are actively working to serve the needs of our l4.in order to further develop our overseas market,we need your help to promote(促銷) our products.

                  i 15doing business with all of you.thank you.

                  part ii vocabulary structure ( 15 minutes)

                  directions: this part is to test your ability to use words and phrases correctly to construct meaningful and grammatically correct sentences. it consists of 2 sections.

                  section a

                  directions: there are 10 incomplete statements here. you are required to complete each statement by choosing the appropriate answer from the 4 choices marked

                  a), b), c) and d). you should mark the corresponding letter on the answer sheet with a single line through the center.

                  16.i am sorry,but i have a question to ____ you.

                  a)treat

                  b)influence

                  c)ask

                  d)change

                  17.please give us the reason ____ the goods were delayed)

                  a)why

                  b)which

                  c)what

                  d)how

                  18.peter will ____ the job as sales manager when john retires.

                  a)put away

                  b)take over

                  c)work out

                  d)make up

                  19.there is no doubt ____ he is a good employee.

                  a)as

                  b)who

                  c)that

                  d)whats

                  20.i feel it’s a great honor for me _____ to this party.

                  a)to invite

                  b)invite

                  c)having invited

                  d)to be invited

                  21.don’t _____ me to help you if you are not working hard)

                  a)guess

                  b)speak

                  c)plan

                  d)expect

                  22.it was two years ago _____ his sister became a doctor.

                  a)that

                  b)where

                  c)who

                  d)what

                  23.the general manager has promised to _____ the matter in person.

                  a)get up

                  b)look into

                  c)see off

                  d)put on

                  24.if you move,you must inform us _____ the change of you adderss.

                  a)with

                  b)for

                  c)in

                  d)of

                  25._____ his lecture is short,it gives us a clear picture of the new program.

                  a)if

                  b)because

                  c.although

                  d)when

                  section b

                  directions: there are also 10 incomplete statements here. you should fill in each blank with the proper form of the word given in brackets. write the word or words in the corresponding space on the answer sheet.

                  26.thomas was cheerful and(help) _____ ,and we soon became good friends.

                  27.the goods that you ordered ten days ago will(deliver) _____ to you tomorrow.

                  28.gas prices are(high) _____ here than in other parts of the country.

                  29.the past decade has seen great economic(develop) _____ in this country.

                  30.if the engineer(come) _____ here yesterday,the problem would have been solved.

                  31.while this new law does not(direct) _____ affect the quality of work,it will greatly benefit employees.

                  32.now many young people spend several hours a day(talk) _____ on a mobile phone.

                  33.in china,it is quite(nature) _____ for people to go back home for the spring festival.

                  34.the manager was surprised at the news when he(receive) _____ the phone call yesterday.

                  35.advances in medical technology have made it possible for people(live) _____ longer.

                  part iii reading comprehension ( 40 minutes)

                  directions: this part is to test your reading ability. there are 5 tasks for you to fulfill. you should read the reading materials carefully and do the tasks as you are instructed.

                  task 1

                  directions: after reading the following passage, you will find 5 questions or unfinished statements, numbered 36 to 40. for each question or statement there are

                  4 choices marked a), b), c) and d). you should make the correct choice and mark the corresponding letter on the answer sheet with a single line through the center.online advertising is the means of selling a product on the internet.with the arrival of the internet,the business world has become digitalized(數字化)and people prefer buying things online,which is easier and faster.online advertising is also known as e-advertising.it offers a great variety of services,which can not be offered by any other way of advertising.

                  one major benefit of online advertising is the immediate spread of information that is not limited by geography or time.online advertising can be viewed day and night throughout the world)besides,it reduces the cost and increases the profit of the company.

                  small businesses especially find online advertising cheap and effective.they can focus on their ideal customers and pay very little for the advertisements.in a word,online advertising is a cheap and effective way of advertising,whose success has so far fully proved its great potential(潛力).

                  36.according to the first paragraph,buying things online is more ____ .

                  a)convenient

                  b)fashionable

                  c)traditional

                  d)reliable

                  37.compared with any other way of advertising,online advertising ____ .

                  a)attracts more customers

                  b)displays more samples

                  c)offers more services

                  d)makes more profits

                  38.which of the following statements is true of online advertising?

                  a)it has taken the place of traditional advertising.

                  b)it will make the internet technology more efficient.

                  c)it can help sell the latest models of digitalized products.

                  d)it can spread information without being limited by time.

                  39.who can especially benefit from online advertising?

                  a)local companies.

                  b)small businesses.

                  c)government departments.

                  d)international organizations.

                  40.this passage is mainly about ____ .

                  a)the function and the use of the internet

                  b)the application of digital technology

                  c)the development of small businesses

                  d)the advantages of online advertising

                  task 2

                  directions: this task is the same as task 1. the 5 questions or unfinished statements are numbered 41 to 45.

                  during our more than 60-year history,with our vast knowledge and experience,

                  大學英語三級試題及答案(10)

                  新編大學英語三級聽力訓練速成答案

                  一、如何聽對話部分

                  Exercise 1

                  1. C

                  2. B

                  3. A

                  4. C

                  5. D

                  6. A

                  7. D

                  8. A

                  9. D

                  10. B

                  11. B

                  12. C

                  13. B

                  14. C

                  15. A

                  Exercise 2

                  1. C

                  2. B

                  3. D

                  4. A

                  5. A

                  6. B

                  7. C

                  8. A

                  9. B

                  10. A

                  11. D

                  12. C

                  13. C

                  14. C

                  15. A

                  Exercise 3

                  1. C

                  2. A

                  3. D

                  4. C

                  5. C

                  6. C

                  7. B

                  8. D

                  9. C

                  10. A

                  11. C

                  12. B

                  13. C

                  14. B

                  15. D

                  Exercise 4

                  1. D

                  2. B

                  3. B

                  4. B

                  5. B

                  6. A

                  7. C

                  8. C

                  9. A

                  10. B

                  11. B

                  12. B

                  13. C

                  14. C

                  15. D

                  Exercise 5

                  1. C

                  2. A

                  3. A

                  4. A

                  5. D

                  6. D

                  7. C

                  8. A

                  9. B

                  10. B

                  11. D

                  12. B

                  13. D

                  14. B

                  15. B

                  Exercise 6

                  1. D

                  2. B

                  3. C

                  4. A

                  5. C

                  6. B

                  7. B

                  8. C

                  9. C

                  10. A

                  11. B

                  12. D

                  13. C

                  14. D

                  15. A

                  Exercise 7

                  1. B

                  2. C

                  3. B

                  4. B

                  5. D

                  6. B

                  7. A

                  8. A

                  9. C

                  10. D

                  11. A

                  12. D

                  13. D

                  14. B

                  15. C

                  Exercise 8

                  1. A

                  2. B

                  3. D

                  4. A

                  5. D

                  6. D

                  7. C

                  8. D

                  9. A

                  10. B

                  11. A

                  12. B

                  13. B

                  14. A

                  15. C

                  Exercise 9

                  1. C

                  2. D

                  3. A

                  4. A

                  5. D

                  6. C

                  7. A

                  8. A

                  9. B

                  10. B

                  11. C

                  12. D

                  13. A

                  14. B

                  15. D

                  Exercise 10

                  1. D

                  2. B

                  3. A

                  4. C

                  5. C

                  6. C

                  7. B

                  8. B

                  9. D

                  10. A

                  11. A

                  12. D

                  13. B

                  14. C

                  15. A

                  二、如何聽短文部分

                  Exercise 1 1. C 2. D

                  Exercise 2 1. D 2. C 3. C

                  Exercise 3 1. B 2. D 3. C 4. C

                  Exercise 4 1. A 2. C 3. A

                  Exercise 5 1. D 2. D 3. D

                  Exercise 6. 1. B 2. B 3. D 4. A

                  Exercise 7 1. A 2. B 3. A

                  Exercise 8 1. D 2. D 3. A 4. C

                  Exercise 9 1. B 2. C 3. D 4. C

                  Exercise 10 1. D 2. D 3. C 4. C

                  Exercise 11 1. C 2. B 3. A 4. B

                  Exercise 12 1. A 2. C 3. B

                  Exercise 13 1. A 2. C 3. A 4. A 5. D

                  Exercise 14 1. B 2. C 3. D相信能就一定能

                  Exercise 15 1. C 2. B 3. C

                  大學英語三級試題及答案(11)


                  石油工程建

                  設有限公司?HSE?教育培訓試題

                  (一級教育)(滿分?100?分?70?分及格)

                  單位: 姓名: 成績:

                  一、?填空題(40)

                  1、?HSE?是三個字母分別指的是中文的 、 、 。

                  2、?HSE?管理體系的七大基本要素是指: 、 、

                  、 、 、 、 。

                  3、?公司健康、安全與環境方針是:  、  、  

                  、 。

                  4、公司?HSE?管理體系于 年?月 日正式發布實施。體系文件包括三

                  大部分:管理手冊、程序文件、作業文件。

                  5、進入工地所有員工必須穿 戴 ,電焊機在使用前必須作好

                  6、高空作業是指在距基準面 米以上(含 米)處的施工作業,高

                  空作業均應系好 ,安全帶的使用時應遵守的原則為 。

                  7、易燃易爆場所在沒有 時,任何情況下嚴禁動火,且要有專人

                  監火。動火作業完工后,應確認現場 后方可離開。

                  8、消防四懂是 、 、 、

                  ;消防四會是: 、 、 、

                  二、?選擇題單選和多選(20?分)


                  1、?HSE?管理的對象是(?)

                  ①?HSE?管理人員?②從事危險作業的員工?③全體員工?④部分員工

                  2、?現場施工的安全“三寶”是(????)

                  ①安全帽???②安全帶???③安全網???④安全平臺

                  3、四不傷害是指(???????)。

                  ①不傷害他人??②不傷害自己??③不被他人傷害??④保護他人不受

                  傷害

                  4、下列(????)幾種情況可認定為工傷。

                  ①直接從事本單位安排的工作,因職業危害因素直接導致的負傷或職

                  業病;

                  ②因履行職責或維護國家利益而遭致傷害的;

                  ③違章操作導致自身傷害的;

                  ④違法犯罪導致自殘的。

                  5、公司《安全生產管理規定》中規定,亂接亂拉電氣線路或手持電動工

                  具未加漏電保護器,每處罰款(????)元,高空作業不帶安全帶,每人

                  罰款(???)元。

                  ①?50?????????②?80?????????③?100??????????④?150

                  三、簡答題(40?分)

                  1、?公司?HSE?戰略目標是什么?


                  題號

                  1

                  2

                  3

                  4

                  5

                  6

                  7

                  8

                  9

                  10

                  答案

                  題號

                  11

                  12

                  13

                  14

                  15

                  16

                  17

                  18

                  19

                  20

                  答案

                  題號

                  21

                  22

                  23

                  24

                  25

                  26

                  27

                  28

                  29

                  30

                  答案

                  題號

                  31

                  32

                  33

                  34

                  35

                  36

                  37

                  38

                  39

                  40

                  答案

                  題號

                  41

                  42

                  43

                  44

                  45

                  46

                  47

                  48

                  49

                  50

                  答案


                  2、干粉滅火器的使用方法?

                  華油工建惠煉二期管廊項目?HSE?教育培訓試題(二級教育)

                  單位: 姓名: 成績: (滿分?100?分?70

                  分及格)

                  1、?承包方作業前必須對施工作業進行危險有害因素識別,編制施工項目( ),重

                  大或不可接受風險編制專項施工方案,方案經監理和業主審批后方可執行。

                  A??風險識別 B?風險識別及控制動態表

                  2、?風險識別實施動態管理,每個專業開工前或危險性較大的施工作業前必須進行風險

                  識別,并將識別出的風險進行( ),交底要有簽字記錄。

                  A??安全技術交底 B?安全交底

                  3、?對識別出的高風險作業要重點進行管理,作業班組每天班前會進行高風險作業告知,

                  并簽訂( ),本人簽字,專人落實?HSE?防范措施。

                  A??告知書 B?高風險作業告知書

                  4、?熱力管網項目主要的高風險作業:動火作業、高處作業、吊裝作業、臨時用電作業、

                  交叉作業等;業主對施工現場高風險作業進行嚴格監管和處罰,特別是對高處作業

                  的腳手架、( )、安全網、占道施工、交叉作業等進行嚴加管控。


                  A??生命線????????B?動火作業

                  5、?每?30?名—50?名施工人員要配置?1?名(??????),安全監督人員需經過?HSE?部考試,

                  領證后才能上崗,安全監督人員只能做現場監督,不能做兼職。

                  A??技術員?????????B?安全監督

                  6、?各承包商(????????)必須持證上崗,且具有有效的資質證書。

                  A??特種作業人員???B?普工

                  7、?(????????)入場必須提供產品合格證與政府主管部門頒發的檢測檢驗證明;所有機具、設備

                  入場按程序經過監理報驗合格并貼標,要有報驗記錄。

                  A??特種設備???????B?施工機具

                  8、?承包商入場前編制完成?HSE?管理計劃、施工組織設計、臨時用電方案等文件;施工前,承包方

                  應按批準的施工組織設計或(???????),向有關作業人員進行安全技術交底和專項安全技能培

                  訓。

                  A??方案???????????B?專項施工方案

                  9、?應在作業現場設置、布置足夠數量的(????????)和滅火器材。

                  A??設備設施???????B?消防滅火設施

                  10、?承包方的物料、機具、車輛未經發包方批準,禁止在道路上擺放、停置,確保消防應急通道暢

                  通,有需要時必須及時辦理(?????????)。

                  A?占道作業許可?????B?進場手續

                  11、?承包方進入業主現場前,所有人員必須經過(?????)HSE?部組織的入場安全教育培訓且考試合

                  格后方可入場。

                  A??監理???????????B?業主

                  12、?承包方所有人員必須經內部(??????????),建立安全教育培訓檔案,簽訂《安全承諾書》,三

                  級安全教育培訓暨:公司級(施工單位)、項目級(施工單位項目部級)、施工隊班組級(入場

                  后作業班組)安全教育;經考試合格,方可錄用。

                  A??三級安全教育培訓????B?一級安全教育培訓

                  13、?承包方根據施工不同階段的作業風險,制定專項的培訓計劃,組織(???????),所有培訓均應

                  有培訓記錄(簽名、培訓資料、照片)。

                  A??專業培訓????????????B?專項培訓

                  14、?人員入場管理要求辦理工傷保險,保險金額不低于(??)萬元的人身意外傷害保險。

                  A??50?萬????????????????B?40?萬

                  15、?對于高風險作業,執行惠州煉化二期項目組(???)類作業許可制度,(???)種作業許可票,(

                  )種固定審批(固定動土區、固定用火區審批表)。涉及一期的高風險作業,執行一期生產廠

                  區作業許可制度。

                  A??10?類??15?種??2?種?????B??15?類??10?種???2?種



                  16、?作業許可證原則上應一作業一辦、一( )一辦。

                  A??事情 B?地點

                  17、?作業許可的延期一般不超過二次,每次不超過其有效控制期限;且最多不超過( )小時。

                  A??8?小時 B?24?小時

                  18、?作業涉及二種或以上作業許可的,應( )辦理作業許可證,不能以一種作業許可

                  證代替另一種作業許可證。不同的作業隊伍也應分別辦理作業許可證,許可證(

                  )。

                  A?分別 不可共用 B?只辦一張 可以共用

                  19、?所有施工人員的工作服樣式應相對統一,安全帽顏色一致,其中( )安全帽僅

                  允許項目部負責人和專職安全管理人員使用。

                  A??黃色 B?紅色

                  20、?施工單位在施工過程中原則上不得使用( )、滑板等臨時性高空作業機具。臨時

                  使用的吊籃必須是有( )的廠家生產制造的產品,并具有產品合格證和其它產

                  品質量證明文件,經監理單位和發包方驗收合格后方可使用;同時應編制專項施工

                  方案,經監理、業主審批后方可作業。

                  A??吊籃??專業資質 B?梯子??營業執照

                  21、?止使用( )。

                  A??鋼制腳手架 B?門式腳手架

                  22、?現場臨邊、洞口、深基坑等需采取防護措施的,施工單位應采用剛性圍欄或木制蓋

                  板、鐵質蓋板等( ),禁止采用警戒線等軟性圍護。夜間作業應設置警示燈。

                  A??硬性圍護 B?柔性圍護

                  23、?現場用電設備應采用防水橡皮護套銅芯軟電纜,禁止使用( )電纜。

                  A??鋁芯 B?銅芯

                  24、?承包方在工程施工期間,應按照( )的要求,確保其現場平整,物料堆放整齊。

                  A??現場施工 B?文明施工

                  25、?承包方的車輛必須嚴格遵守場內交通規定,禁止( )和違章停放,對違章行

                  駛和停放的,發包方有權對其進行處理,違章情節嚴重的,將其列入黑名單,清除

                  出場;司機在駕駛時禁止打電話和聽音樂。

                  A??超速行駛 B?低速行駛

                  26、?施工現場存在交叉作業雙方(與本單位以外的其它施工單位)必須簽訂( )。

                  A??交叉作業安全管理協議??B?安全管理協議


                  27、?承包方應當加強現場易燃、易爆材料、火工器材、有毒與腐蝕性材料和其他危險品

                  的管理,易燃易爆危險品不得(?????),應按相關安全管理規定妥善保管和處理。

                  A??入庫保管?????????????B?露天堆放

                  28、?涂裝作業涉及到其他作業時,應執行相應的作業許可管理規定辦理高處作業、腳手

                  架作業、受限空間作業等;現場防腐、保溫作業如出現高處作業應搭設合格的(

                  )。

                  A??作業平臺???????????????B?安全通道

                  29、?作業區域設置(???????)、配備相應的消防滅火器材,現場應根據作業情況適量存

                  放材料,不得在現場存放大量材料。

                  A??安全警示標識????????????B?安全標語

                  30、?施工單位產生的垃圾要(?????)收集、處理,不可隨意拋卸。

                  A??集中????????????????????B?分類

                  31、?建筑垃圾由施工單位自行運送到場外政府主管部門(???????)的地點。

                  A??指定????????????????????B?生活垃圾

                  32、?現場的危險廢物,施工單位在場內設置合規的危險廢物(???????),且具備防滲防

                  雨功能。清理外運危險廢物時應提前向?HSE?部申請,由?HSE?部委托有資質的單位清

                  理出場。

                  A??露天堆放????????????????B?臨時儲存場所

                  33、?現場的生活垃圾、生活污水,施工單位必須委托業主指定的(???????)處理。

                  A??環保服務商??????????????B?施工隊伍

                  34、?承包方應建立應急組織機構和應急救援隊伍,配備相應的(?????),包括急救設施

                  和藥品,應急物資應齊全、完好、備用。

                  A??物資????????????????????B?應急物資

                  35、?承包商發生亡人事故的,按照(???)萬\人的標準對承包方進行扣款,該款從承包

                  商的工程款中扣除,事故的所有善后處理費用由承包方負責。

                  A??40?萬????????????????????B?50?萬施工單位使用的腳手架必須符合國家標準的鋼

                  制腳手架,禁止使用竹腳手架、竹腳手板;禁

                  36、?施工單位自進場之日至完成工程、撤離現場期間的現場保衛管理由(??)自行負責。

                  A??業主單位?????????????????B?施工單位

                  37、?車輛進出門崗限速(????)公里\小時,施工現場限速(??)公里\小時,第一次超

                  速者給予警告,第二次超速者給予扣款,第三次超速者給予扣款、清除出場并列入

                  黑名單。

                  A??15?公里???30?公里?????????B?30?公里????20?公里


                  38、?施工單位應阻止與其承包的工程項目無關的任何未經授權的人員、車輛、或機械進

                  入其所轄現場,發生事故按照( )原則處置。

                  A??四不放過 B?屬地管理

                  39、?每臺電氣設備應使用單獨開關( ),嚴禁用同一個開關直接控制二臺及二臺

                  以上電氣設備。

                  A 一機一閘一保護 B?多機一閘

                  40、?沒有起重作業操作證或操作證審查不合格的人員,( )從事起重作業。

                  A??可以 B?禁止

                  41、?在停工或休息時,( )將吊物、吊籠、吊具和吊索懸吊在空中。

                  A 不得 B?可以

                  42、?( )級以上大風或大雨、大霧等惡劣天氣及夜間照明不足時,不得從事任何級

                  別起重作業。

                  A 5?級 B?6?級

                  43、?( )隨吊物起吊或在吊鉤、吊物下停留;吊裝重物時,起吊繩、鏈所經過的

                  棱角處應加襯墊。

                  A??禁止 B?可以

                  44、?在高出基準面( )米以上有墜落可能的位置進行的作業稱為高處作業。

                  A??1.5?米 B?2?米

                  45、?在高處作業的人員必須系好全身式雙掛鉤?5?點式安全帶,安全帶應( ),其所掛位置必須牢固。

                  A??高掛低用 B?低掛高用

                  46、?在道路和設備、設施上方或上下交叉作業區域,及人和物體有墜落可能的高處作業區域進行作業時,

                  必須掛設( ),拉警戒線;如果必須進行交叉作業,中間應有( )。

                  A??安全網 隔離措施 B?安全帶 生命繩

                  47、?施工現場通道附近的各類洞口與坑、槽等處,除必須設置有效防護設施外,夜間還必須設( )作

                  警示。

                  A??黃燈 B?紅燈

                  48、?現場腳手架執行( )管理制度。

                  A??檢查 B?掛牌

                  49、?( )利用腳手架吊運重物、在腳手架上拉結吊裝纜繩、任意拆除腳手架部件、起吊作業時碰撞

                  或扯動腳手架。

                  A??嚴禁 B?可以

                  50、?腳手架拆除前,拆除作業影響區域范圍內應設警戒圍欄和警戒標識,并設( ),禁止非作業人員

                  入內或通行,嚴禁向下投擲。

                  A??專人監護 B?技術員


                  惠煉二期三級安全考核試卷(滿分100分70分及格)

                  姓名:____________崗位:____________評分:____________

                  一、單項選擇題(每道小題3分?共45分)

                  1、在容器內施焊時,應采取通風措施,照明電壓不得超過 V。容器內施焊應采

                  用絕緣材料使焊工身體與焊件隔離。間隔作業時焊工到外面休息。

                  A.?12 B.?24 C.?36;

                  2、在有墜落危險的高處作業時,應系好安全帶。安全帶應 ,掛在牢靠處。

                  A.?高掛高用 B.?高掛低用 C.?低掛高用 D.?低掛低用

                  3、高度大于6m的腳手架,宜采用 斜道。

                  A.?之字形 B.?人字形 C.?一字形

                  4、《中華人民共和國安全生產法》第二十八條規定,生產經營單位應當在較大危險因素

                  的生產經營場所和有關設施、設備上,設置明顯的 。

                  A.?安全宣傳標語 B.安全警示標志 C.?安全宣教掛圖

                  5、施工現場安全由 負責。

                  A.?業主 B.?監理公司 C.?建筑施工企業

                  6、當槽、坑、溝的開挖深度超過 m時,必須根據土質和深度情況放坡或加護壁支

                  撐。

                  A.?1 B.?1.5 C.?2

                  7、當遇有 及以上大風時應停止腳手架搭設與拆除作業。

                  A.?四級 B.?五級 C.?六級

                  8、保障人民群眾 安全,是制定《中華人民共和國安全生產法》的目的之一。

                  A.?生命 B.?財產 C.?生命和財產

                  9、安全生產責任制的關鍵是 。

                  A.?健全、完善 B.?貫徹落實 C.?分工明確


                  10、建筑施工企業必須為從事危險作業的職工辦理????????保險,支付保險費。

                  A.?財產???B.?人壽???C.?意外傷害

                  11、安全帶的壽命一般為3~5年。使用?????年后,應按批量抽檢。

                  A.?2???B.?3???C.?4

                  12、固定式直爬梯應用???????制成。

                  A.?木材???B.?金屬材料???C.?玻璃鋼

                  13、腳手架的主節點處必須設置一根橫向水平桿,用????????扣接且嚴禁拆除。

                  A.?直角扣件???B.?旋轉扣件???C.?對接扣件

                  14、模板、腳手架等拆除時,????????不得有其他操作人員。

                  A.?周圍???B.?上方???C.?下方

                  15、電氣設備不帶電的金屬外殼、框架、部件、管道、金屬操作臺和移動式碘鎢燈的金

                  屬柱等,均應做????????保護。

                  A.?保護接零(與專用保護零線連接,PE線)

                  B.?與工作零線連接(N線)???????C.?不接地

                  二、判斷題(每小題4分,共40分)

                  1、嚴禁起吊重物長時間懸掛在空中,作業中遇突發故障,應采取措施將重物降落到安全

                  地方,并關閉發動機或切斷電源后進行檢修。(???)

                  2、分層施工的樓梯口和樓梯邊,必須安裝正式防護欄桿。頂層樓梯口應隨工程結構進度

                  安裝臨時護欄。(??)

                  3、電纜線路可采用埋地或架空敷設,也可以用鎧裝電纜在地面上明設,但要防止腐蝕、

                  水泡或機械損傷。(??)

                  4、照明線路嚴禁在地面上亂拉、亂拖,但可以拴在金屬腳手架、龍門架上,只要求距離

                  工作面高度在3m以上即可,控制刀閘應配有熔斷器和防雨措施。(??)

                  5、電焊機必須有正確、可靠的接零或接地保護。(??)

                  6、挖掘機司機離開操作位置,不論時間長短,只要關閉發動機即可。(??)

                  7、建筑工程安全生產三級教育是指公司、項目(工區、工程處、施工隊),班組的三級


                  安全培訓教育,經考核合格后,方能上崗。(??)

                  8、生產經營單位的從業人員是指該單位從事生產經營活動各項工作的所有人員,包括管

                  理人員、技術人員和各崗位的工人,但不包括臨時聘用的人員。( )

                  9、施工作業場所有墜落可能的物件,應一律先行拆除或加以固定。( )

                  10、開關箱與用電設備之間,可實行“一閘多機”和一臺漏電保護器同時保護幾臺設備

                  的做法。(??)

                  三、簡答題(第一小題10分,第二5分)

                  1、“四不傷害”是哪四不傷害?

                  2、本崗位的?HSE


                  一級答案

                  一、填空題

                  1、?健康?、 安全?、?環境

                  2、領導和承諾、方針和目標、組織機構資源和文件、風險評價和風險消

                  減管理、規劃、實施與監測、審核與評審。

                  3、以人為本?、安全第一 、保護環境 、遵守法規、持續改進。

                  4、2014?年?1?月?30?日

                  5、工作服 安全帽 接地接零保護

                  6、?2 2 安全帶 高掛低用

                  7、動火作業票 無火源

                  8、懂本崗位火災危險性、懂預防火災的措施、懂撲救火災的方法、 懂

                  逃生方法 會報火警、會使用消防器材、會撲救初期火災、會組織

                  疏散。

                  二、選擇題

                  1、③。 2、①②③ 3、①②③④ 4、① 5、①③

                  3、問答題

                  1、答:樹立一流企業形象,追求零傷害、零污染、零事故、提高職業健

                  康、安全與環境表現水平,躋身國內同行業前列。

                  2、答:首先提至火場選擇上風有利地形,然后拔掉噴嘴堵頭,一手握住

                  噴管,另一手再拔掉保險并緊握提柄,提起機身對準火焰根部迅速撲救,

                  直至把火撲滅。

                  二級試卷答案


                  BABAB???AABBA???BABBA???BBABA???BAABA???ABAAB

                  ABABB???BABAB??ABABA???ABBAA

                  三級教育答案

                  1、單項選擇

                  ABABC???BCCBC????ABACA

                  2、判斷題

                  √√××√?????×√×√×

                  3、簡答題

                  (一)答:

                  不傷害自己、不傷害他人、不被別人他人傷害、保護他

                  人不受傷害

                  (二)答:自己寫一下自己本崗位的HSE職責。

                  大學英語三級試題及答案(12)

                  英語三級試題及答案

                  【篇一:英語三級考試真題及答案】

                  ss=txt>part i reading comprehension (30%)

                  directions: there are three passages in this part. each passage is followed by some questions or unfinished statements. for each of them there are four choices marked a, b, c and d. you should decide on the best choice and blacken the corresponding letter on the answer sheet.passage 1

                  questions 1 to 5 are based on the following passage:

                  in the united states elementary education begins at the age of six. at this stage nearly ail the teachers are women, mostly married. (76) the atmosphere is usually very friendly, and the teachers have now accepted the idea that the important thing is to make the children happy and interested. the old authoritarian (要絕對服從的) methods of education were discredited (不被認可) rather a long time ago - so much so that many people now think that they have gone too far in the direction of trying to make children happy and interested rather than giving them actual instruction.

                  the social education of young children tries to make them accept the idea that human beings in a society need to work together for their common good. so the emphasis is on co-operation rather than competition throughout most of this process. this may seem curious, in view of the fact that american society is highly competitive; however, the need for making people sociable in this sense has come to be regarded as one of the functions of education. most americans do grow up with competitive ideas, and obviously quite a few as criminals, but it is not fair to say that the educational system fails. it probably does succeed in making most people sociable and ready to help one another both in material ways and through kindness and friendliness.

                  1. according to the passage, the u.s. elementary education is supposed to make children__________.

                  a. sensible and sensitive b. competitive and interested

                  c. curious and friendlyd. happy and co-operative

                  2. some americans complain about elementary schools because they think__________.

                  a. children are reluctant to help each other

                  b. schools lay too much emphasis on co-operation

                  c. children should grow up with competitive ideas

                  d. schools give little actual instruction to children

                  3. the authors attitude towards american education can be best described as__________.

                  a. favorable b. negative

                  c. tolerant d. unfriendly

                  4. the american educational system emphasizes__________.

                  a. material wealth b. competition

                  c. co-operationd. personal benefit

                  5. the word sociable (line 8, paragraph 2) most probably means__________.

                  a. fond of talking freely

                  b. friendly with other people

                  c. concerned about social welfare

                  d. happy at school

                  passage 2

                  questions 6 to 10 are based on the following passage:

                  nonverbal (非語言的) communication has to do with gestures, movements and closeness of two people when they are talking. (77) the scientists say that those gestures, movements and so on have meaning which words do not carry.

                  on the other hand, too long a gaze can make people uncomfortable. the eyes apparently play a great part in nonverbal communication. genuine warmth or interest, shyness or confidence can often be seen in the eyes. we do not always consider a smile to be a sign of friendliness. someone who is always smiling, and with little apparent reasons, often makes us uneasy.

                  6. according to the passage, nonverbal communication__________.

                  a. is a method often used by people who cannot speak

                  b. can tell something that words cannot

                  c. can be used to talk with people who cannot bear

                  d. is less used than words

                  7. the south american__________.

                  a. tends to keep a distance between himself and the person he is speaking to

                  b. usually stands close to the person he is talking to

                  c. is often unfriendly when spoken to

                  d. is often cold and distant when speaking

                  8. which of the following is not true?

                  a. less eye contact suggests distance in relation.

                  b. the longer one looks at you, the more interest he has in you.

                  c. there is more eye contact between people who like each other.

                  d. shorter eye contact shows more interest in what one is talking about

                  9. too long a gaze__________.

                  a. may upset people being looked at

                  b. shows ones great confidence

                  c. indicates ones interest in the talk

                  d. tells you how friendly one is

                  10. constant smiling without apparent reason__________.

                  a. is a sign of ones friendliness

                  b. is a sign of ones unfriendliness

                  c. makes people feel happy

                  d. makes people feel uncomfortable

                  passage 3

                  questions 11 to 15 are based on the following passage:

                  television has opened windows in everybodys life. young men will never again go t

                  o war as they did in 1914. millions of people now have seen the effects of a battle. and the result has been a general dislike of war, and perhaps more interest in helping those who suffer from all the terrible things that have been shown on the sc-teen.

                  television has also changed politics. the most distant areas can now follow state affairs, see and hear the politicians before an election. better informed, people are more likely to vote, and so to make their opinion count.

                  unfortunately, televisions influence has been extremely harnfful to the young. (79) children do not have enough experience to realize that tv shows present an ueal world; that tv advertisements lie to sell products that are sometimes bad or useless. they believe that the violence they see is normal and acceptable. all educators agree that the television generations are more violent than their parents and grandparents.

                  also, the young are less patient. (80) used to tv shows, where everything is quick and interesting, they do not have the patience to read an article without pictures; to read a book that requires thinking; to listen to a teacher who doesnt do funny things like the people on childrens programs. and they expect all problems to be solved happily in ten, fifteen, or thirty minutes. thats the time it takes on the screen.

                  11. in the past, many young people__________.

                  a. knew the effects of war

                  b. went in for politics

                  c. liked to save the wounded in wars

                  d. were willing to be soldiers

                  12. now with tv people can__________.

                  a. discus politics at an information center

                  b. show more interest in politics

                  c. make theft own decisions on political affairs

                  d. express their opinions freely

                  13. the author thinks that tv advertisements__________.

                  a. are not reliable on the whole

                  b. are useless to people

                  c. are a good guide to adults

                  d. are very harmful to the young

                  14. which is not true according to the passage?

                  a. people have become used to crimes now.

                  b. with a tv set some problems can be solved quickly.

                  c. people now like to read books with pictures.

                  d. the adults are less violent than the young.

                  15. from the passage, we can conclude that__________.

                  a. children should keep away from tv

                  b. tv programs should be improved

                  c. childrens books should have pictures

                  d. tv has a deep influence on the young

                  part ii vocabulary and structure (30%)

                  directions: in this part there are 30 incomplete sentences. for each sentence there are four choices marked a, b, c and d. choose the one answer that best completes the sentence. then blacken the corresponding letter on the answer sheet.

                  16. it was while she was sleeping in her bedroom __________ a thief broke into the house.

                  a. whichb. that

                  c. whered. than

                  17. in learning english we should not ____our students of their mistakes all the time.

                  a. remind b. remember

                  c. remain d. remark

                  18. these three teachers vary __________ their manner of teaching.

                  a. between b. from

                  c. withd. in

                  19. who can it be? im quite __________ a loss to guess.

                  a. ofb. on

                  c. in d. at

                  20. the monitor __________ the examination papers to the class for his teacher.

                  a. delivered b. distributed

                  c. reportedd. presented

                  21. have you any __________ that you were not there at 9 oclock last night?

                  a. statementb. cause

                  c. words d. proof

                  22. the children looked up as the planes passed __________.

                  a. overall b. overhead

                  c. outwardd. forward

                  23. charles dickens __________ many wonderful characters in his novels.

                  a. inventedb. discovered

                  c. uncovered d. created

                  24.many young people find it harder to appreciate __________ music than pop music.

                  a. simple b. light

                  c. ancient d. classical

                  25. if the wounded soldier had been given first __________, he would not have died.

                  a. help b. aid

                  c. care d. attention

                  26. since he left the university, he __________ in an accounting company.

                  a. has been working b. had worked

                  c. had been working d. was working

                  27. the weather in china is different from__________.

                  a. americab. in america

                  c. that in america d. one in america

                  28. it was not until dawn __________ their way out of the forest.

                  a. when they found b. that they found

                  c. did they find d. that they didnt lind

                  29. __________ he says or does wont make me change my mind at all.

                  a. whatever b. however

                  c. which d. how

                  30. we all believe that itd be hard for him to __________ extra responsibilities now.

                  a. take apart b. take up

                  c. take on d. take back

                  31. he was very rude to the customs officer, ____ of course made things even worse.

                  a. who b. whom

                  c. what d. which

                  32. the goods __________ when we arrived at the airport.

                  a. were just unloadingb. were just been unloading

                  c. had just unloaded d. were just being unloaded

                  33. all things__________, the planned trip had to be called off.

                  a. considered b. be considered

                  c. consideringd. having considered

                  34. __________ purpose did you say their team would beat ours?

                  a. for which b. what

                  c. for what d. which

                  35. since there isnt much time left, you can just tell us about it__________.

                  a. in detailb. in short

                  c. in alld. in brief

                  36. people appreciate __________ with him because he has a good sense of humor.

                  a. to workb. working

                  c. to have workedd. have working

                  37. the little village hasnt changed much _______ a new road and two more stores.

                  a. except b. besides

                  【篇二:大學英語三級考試模擬題及答案】

                  試題型: |考試時間:6月份下旬周日開考

                  (1)part i section a b listening comprehension(15minutes) section a b

                  (2)part i section c listening comprehension(15minutes) section c

                  (3)part Ⅱ structure(15minutes) section a

                  (4)part Ⅱ structure(15minutes) section b

                  (5)part Ⅲ reading comprehension(40minutes) section a b

                  (6)part Ⅲ reading comprehension(40minutes) section c d e

                  (7)part Ⅳ translion(25minutes)

                  (8)part Ⅴ writing(25minutes)

                  part i 聽力略

                  part ii vocabulary structure

                  directions: this part is to test your ability to construct grammatically correct sentences. it consists of 2 sections.

                  section a

                  directions: in this section, there are 10 incomplete sentences. you are required to complete each one by deciding on the most appropriate word or words from the 4 choices marked a), b), c) and d). then you should mark the corresponding letter on the answer sheet with a single line through the center.

                  16. although ,he insisted _________going there together with us.

                  a) tob) onc) atd) for

                  17. i’ll ask mr. smith to ring you up _________he comes back to the office.

                  a) whenb) wherec) becaused) although

                  18. they regard _________as their duty to provide the best service for their customers.

                  a) thisb) whatc) itd) that

                  19. not until the day before yesterday _________to give a speech at the meeting.

                  a) he agreedb) does he agreec) he agreesd) did he agree

                  20. _________up at the clock on the wall,the secretary found it was already midnight.

                  a) lookingb) lookc) to lookd) looked

                  21. the first textbook _________for teaching english as a foreign language came out in the 16th century.

                  a) writingb) writtenc) to writed) to be written

                  22. young _________he is, an able salesman.

                  a) thatb) whoc) asd) which

                  23. i don’t doubt _________the stock market will recover from the economic crisis.

                  a) ifb) whatc) thatd) which

                  24. in our company,great changes _________since the new manager came.

                  a) took placeb) take placec) will have taken placed) have taken place

                  25. news came from the sales manager _________the new product had been selling well in the local market for three months.

                  a) whoseb) whatc) whichd) that

                  section b

                  directions: there are 10 incomplete statements here. you should fill in each blank with the proper form of the word given in brackets. write the word or words in the corresponding space on the answer sheet.

                  26. sandy made quite a number of(apply) _________for a management position but failed every time.

                  27. the graduates had a(cheer) _________farewell party before leaving the college.

                  28. karl probably(see) _________“star wars” several times for he knows every detail of the film.

                  29. believe it or not,when first(introduce) _________to europe,tomato was thought to be poisonous.

                  30. a telephone user may pay a fixed monthly charge and(allow) _________to make an unlimited number of local calls in the month.

                  31. i remember(see) _________you somewhere before,but i can’t tell the exact place.

                  32. i don’t think it necessary(discuss) _________the the problem is settled.

                  33. since five managers are going to give their reports,the meeting(last) _________for at least two hours.

                  34. although he was(deep) _________hurt by what she said to him,he made no reply.

                  35. it is strongly recommended that teachers(use) _________computers to assist in their classroom teaching.

                  答案:16-20:bacda 21-25:bccdd

                  26.applications 27.cheerful 28.has seen 29.introduced 30.be allowed

                  31.having seen 32.to discuss 33.will last 34.deeply 35.use/should use

                  part iii reading comprehension

                  directions: this part is to test your reading ability. there are 5 tasks for you to fulfill. you should read the reading materials carefully and do the tasks as you are instructed. task 1

                  directions: after reading the following passage, you will find 5 questions or unfinished

                  statements, numbered 36 to 40. for each question or statement there are 4 choices marked a), b),

                  c) and d). you should make the correct choice and mark the corresponding letter on the answer sheet with a single line through the center.

                  melbourne,with a population of over 3.5 million,is the second largest city in australia. it is clean,safe,dynamic and exciting,and well known internationally for its universities and other educational institutions.

                  the city has well-planned tree-lined beautiful parks and gardens. it has a good transport system of roads,buses,trains,and trams(電車). the la trobe university(拉特羅布大學) campus is connected to the central business district by trams,express buses,and bus and train connections.

                  melbourne is a culturally rich city,and is home to large communities of people from all parts of europe,the americas,africa,and asia. the city is famous for its restaurants,theatres,music,opera,ballet,art,culture,and shops,and a lively and dynamic nightlife. melbourne people are enthusiastic about sports,and the city hosts many famous international sports events. near melbourne there are beautiful coastlines with excellent beaches,national parks,forests,wineries(葡萄酒廠) ,winter snowfields and summer resorts.

                  the climate is temperate and comfortable,with warm summers and cool winters. in summer,maximum daytime temperatures range from 26℃to 36℃,and in winter from 12℃ to 18℃.1]he weather in

                  melbourne can be variable from day to day. in 2002.melbourne was rated the world’s best city to live in by the economist intelligence unit.

                  36. melbourne is well-known in the world for its__________________.

                  a) large populationb) educational institutions

                  c) transport systemd) beautiful parks and gardens

                  37.according to the passage,melbourne is a city where_________.

                  a) rich people choose to liveb) the best wine is produced

                  c) various cultures exist d) asian food is popular

                  38. melbourne people are very interested in_________.

                  a) sportsb) sunbathingc) sightseeingd) traveling

                  39. the word temperate in the sentence “the climate is temperate?”(line 10) ,most probably means ________.

                  a) hotb) mildc) dryd) cold

                  40. the best title for the passage might be_________.

                  a) an ideal place for shopping b) a city with the best climate

                  c) the world’s best city to live in d) the world’s most beautiful city

                  task 2

                  directions: this task is the same as task 1. the 5 questions or unfinished statements are numbered 41 to 45.

                  terms and conditions of employment

                  these terms and conditions should be read before you sign your contract.

                  salary:your starting salary is:$15,000.this is reviewed annually.

                  hours: work are eight hours a day,monday through friday. you will start work on feb.21,2008.on the first morning,report to your line manager john knight.

                  health and safety:please read the safety regulations attached. if you have any questions,contact the health and safety officer,whose name is at the top of the regulation sheet. if you have health problems,please inform the senior nurse,chris thomas. if you cannot work because of illness,please telephone the factory.

                  annual leave:during your first year of employment you ale allowed twenty days’ leave. this should be arranged with your line manager.

                  overtime(加班) :if you work more than forty hours a week,you will be paid at the current overtime rate. your line manager will keep a record of the overtime you work. if you work on public holidays,you will be paid at the current rates. if you prefer,time can be taken instead of extra pay for public holidays and overtime.

                  clothing:the supplies department provides overalls(工作服) .inform supplies of your size two days before you need them. you can also order any other equipment you need for your job from supplies.

                  41. according to the contract,the salary of the employee_________.

                  a) is paid weekly b) is adjusted every quarter

                  c) is re-examined from year to year d) is fixed for the whole contract period

                  42. if employees have any health problem,they should_________.

                  a) telephone the factoryb) inform the senior nurse

                  c) report to t11eir line manager d) contact the health and safety officer

                  43. the line manager is responsible for____________.

                  a) giving a pay raiseb) signing a contract

                  c) arranging annual leaved) helping with personal affairs

                  44. if employees work on public holidays,usually they will get_________.

                  a) extra days offb) extra money

                  c) a pay raised) paid holidays

                  45. when they need overalls for their job,employees should inform the supplies department of_________.

                  a) the size b) the color

                  c) the style d) the quantity

                  答案:36-40:bcabc 41-45:cbcba

                  task 3

                  directions: the following is part of a job advertisement. after reading it, you are required to complete the outline below it (no.46 to no.50). you should write your answers briefly (in no more than three words) on the answer sheet correspondingly.

                  information security specialist

                  job description:

                  establishes and satisfies highly challenging and complex information system security(iss) requirements based upon the analysis of user,operational,policy,regulatory,and resource demands.supports the development,implementation,and operation of iss-enabling technologies, processes, and procedures into client systems and networks.also requires an expert understanding of security policy advocated by the u.s government including department of defense and other agencies,e.g.,treasury,as well as commercial best security practices.

                  education:

                  bachelor’s degree in computer science or related fields.

                  required skills:

                  iss policy,procedures,and planning,racf,lan,life cycle,microsoft nt,network security,office automation tools.

                  location:

                  new carrollton,maryland or falls church, virginia

                  contact us at:

                  u.s. citizenship or u.s. permanent resident status required for employment.

                  a job advertisement

                  position offered: -46-

                  responsibilities:to establish and satisfy -47- requirements

                  qualifications:1. -48- degree

                  2.required skills

                  citizenship required:us citizenship or -49-

                  way of contact:by -50-

                  答案:46.information security specialist 47.information system security 48.bachelors

                  49.permanet resident status 50.e-mail

                  task 4

                  directions: the following is a list of terms for library signs. after reading it, you are required to find the items equivalent to (與?等同) those given in chinese in the table below. then you should put the corresponding letters in the brackets on the answer sheet, numbered 51 through 55.

                  a—reading,reference and copying

                  b—staff only

                  c—closed shelves for undergraduates

                  d—information retrieval room

                  e—inter-library loan

                  f—display&reading room for new books

                  g—multi-media reading room

                  h—reference department office

                  i—novelty research

                  j—lecture hall

                  k—reading room for reference books

                  l—return deposit

                  m—reading room

                  【篇三:大學英語三級b級考試真題+答案】

                  ss=txt>part i listening comprehension ( 15 minutes)

                  directions: this part is to test your listening ability .it consists of 3 sections.

                  section a

                  directions: this section is to test your ability to give proper responses. there are 5 recorded questions in it. after each question, there is a pause. the questions will be spoken two times. when you hear a question, you should decide on the correct answer from the 4 choices marked a),b),c) and d) given in your test paper. then you should mark the corresponding letter on the answer sheet with a single line through the center.

                  example: you will hear:

                  you will read:

                  a) i’m not sure.

                  b) you’re right.

                  c) yes, certainly.

                  d) that’s interesting.

                  from the question we learn that the speaker is asking the listener to leave a message. therefore, c) yes, certainly is the correct answer. you should mark c) on the answer sheet.

                  [a] [b] [c] [d]

                  now the test will begin.

                  1.

                  a)just a moment,please.

                  b)fine,thank you.

                  c)see you.

                  d)well done.

                  2.

                  a)glad to meet you.

                  b)yes,please.

                  c)it may not last long.

                  d)in twenty minutes.

                  3.

                  a)yes,please.

                  b)on monday.

                  c) i see.

                  d)good-bye.

                  4.

                  a)no problem.

                  b)many times.

                  c)i don’t know.

                  d)my pleasure.

                  5.

                  a)you are welcome.

                  b)he’s nice.

                  c)it’s perfect.

                  d)it’s two o’clock.

                  section b

                  directions: this section is to test your ability to understand short dialogues. there are 5 recorded dialogues in it. after each dialogue, there is a recorded question. both the dialogues and questions will be spoken two times. when you hear a question, you should decide on the correct answer from the 4 choices marked a),

                  b), c) and d) given in your test paper. then you should mark the corresponding letter on the answer sheet with a single line through the center.

                  6. a)he’s got a headache.

                  b)he can’t sleep at night.

                  c)he coughs a lot.

                  d)he doesn’t feel like eating.

                  7. a)have some food.

                  b)clean the table.

                  c)make a phone call.

                  d)buy a dictionary.

                  8. a)the sales manager.

                  b)the information officer.

                  c)the office secretary.

                  d)the chief engineer.

                  9. a)teacher and student.

                  b)manager and secretary.

                  c)police officer and driver.

                  d)husband and wife.

                  10.a)asking the way.

                  b)buying a ticket.

                  c)checking in at the airport.

                  d)booking a room.

                  section c

                  directions: in this section you will hear a recorded short passage. the passage is printed in the test paper, but with some words or phrases missing. the passage will be read three times. during the second reading, you are required to put the missing words or phrases on the answer sheet in order of the numbered blanks according to what you hear. the third reading is for you to check your writing. now the passage will begin.

                  ladies and gentlemen,

                  it’s a great pleasure to have you visit us today.i’m very happy to have the opportunity to 11 our company to you.

                  the company was established in l950.we mainly manufacture electronic goods and 12 them all over the over the world)our sales were about $100 million last year,and our business is growing steadily.

                  we have offices in asia,13 and europe.we have about l,000 employees,who are actively working to serve the needs of our l4.in order to further develop our overseas market,we need your help to promote(促銷) our products.

                  i 15doing business with all of you.thank you.

                  part ii vocabulary structure ( 15 minutes)

                  directions: this part is to test your ability to use words and phrases correctly to construct meaningful and grammatically correct sentences. it consists of 2 sections.

                  section a

                  directions: there are 10 incomplete statements here. you are required to complete each statement by choosing the appropriate answer from the 4 choices marked

                  a), b), c) and d). you should mark the corresponding letter on the answer sheet with a single line through the center.

                  16.i am sorry,but i have a question to ____ you.

                  a)treat

                  b)influence

                  c)ask

                  d)change

                  17.please give us the reason ____ the goods were delayed)

                  a)why

                  b)which

                  c)what

                  d)how

                  18.peter will ____ the job as sales manager when john retires.

                  a)put away

                  b)take over

                  c)work out

                  d)make up

                  19.there is no doubt ____ he is a good employee.

                  a)as

                  b)who

                  c)that

                  d)whats

                  20.i feel it’s a great honor for me _____ to this party.

                  a)to invite

                  b)invite

                  c)having invited

                  d)to be invited

                  21.don’t _____ me to help you if you are not working hard)

                  a)guess

                  b)speak

                  c)plan

                  d)expect

                  22.it was two years ago _____ his sister became a doctor.

                  a)that

                  b)where

                  c)who

                  d)what

                  23.the general manager has promised to _____ the matter in person.

                  a)get up

                  b)look into

                  c)see off

                  d)put on

                  24.if you move,you must inform us _____ the change of you adderss.

                  a)with

                  b)for

                  c)in

                  d)of

                  25._____ his lecture is short,it gives us a clear picture of the new program.

                  a)if

                  b)because

                  c.although

                  d)when

                  section b

                  directions: there are also 10 incomplete statements here. you should fill in each blank with the proper form of the word given in brackets. write the word or words in the corresponding space on the answer sheet.

                  26.thomas was cheerful and(help) _____ ,and we soon became good friends.

                  27.the goods that you ordered ten days ago will(deliver) _____ to you tomorrow.

                  28.gas prices are(high) _____ here than in other parts of the country.

                  29.the past decade has seen great economic(develop) _____ in this country.

                  30.if the engineer(come) _____ here yesterday,the problem would have been solved.

                  31.while this new law does not(direct) _____ affect the quality of work,it will greatly benefit employees.

                  32.now many young people spend several hours a day(talk) _____ on a mobile phone.

                  33.in china,it is quite(nature) _____ for people to go back home for the spring festival.

                  34.the manager was surprised at the news when he(receive) _____ the phone call yesterday.

                  35.advances in medical technology have made it possible for people(live) _____ longer.

                  part iii reading comprehension ( 40 minutes)

                  directions: this part is to test your reading ability. there are 5 tasks for you to fulfill. you should read the reading materials carefully and do the tasks as you are instructed.

                  task 1

                  directions: after reading the following passage, you will find 5 questions or unfinished statements, numbered 36 to 40. for each question or statement there are

                  4 choices marked a), b), c) and d). you should make the correct choice and mark the corresponding letter on the answer sheet with a single line through the center.online advertising is the means of selling a product on the internet.with the arrival of the internet,the business world has become digitalized(數字化)and people prefer buying things online,which is easier and faster.online advertising is also known as e-advertising.it offers a great variety of services,which can not be offered by any other way of advertising.

                  one major benefit of online advertising is the immediate spread of information that is not limited by geography or time.online advertising can be viewed day and night throughout the world)besides,it reduces the cost and increases the profit of the company.

                  small businesses especially find online advertising cheap and effective.they can focus on their ideal customers and pay very little for the advertisements.in a word,online advertising is a cheap and effective way of advertising,whose success has so far fully proved its great potential(潛力).

                  36.according to the first paragraph,buying things online is more ____ .

                  a)convenient

                  b)fashionable

                  c)traditional

                  d)reliable

                  37.compared with any other way of advertising,online advertising ____ .

                  a)attracts more customers

                  b)displays more samples

                  c)offers more services

                  d)makes more profits

                  38.which of the following statements is true of online advertising?

                  a)it has taken the place of traditional advertising.

                  b)it will make the internet technology more efficient.

                  c)it can help sell the latest models of digitalized products.

                  d)it can spread information without being limited by time.

                  39.who can especially benefit from online advertising?

                  a)local companies.

                  b)small businesses.

                  c)government departments.

                  d)international organizations.

                  40.this passage is mainly about ____ .

                  a)the function and the use of the internet

                  b)the application of digital technology

                  c)the development of small businesses

                  d)the advantages of online advertising

                  task 2

                  directions: this task is the same as task 1. the 5 questions or unfinished statements are numbered 41 to 45.

                  during our more than 60-year history,with our vast knowledge and experience,

                  大學英語三級試題及答案(13)

                  SECTIONI Listening Comprehension  (25minutes)

                    Directions:

                    This section is designed to test yourability to understand spoken English.You will hear aselection of recorded materials and you must answer thequestions that accompany them.There are two parts in this section,Part A and Part B.

                    Remember,while you are doingthe test,you should first put down your answers in your test book let.At the end of thelistening comprehension section.you will have 3 minutes to transfer your answers from your test booklet to ANSWER SHEET 1.

                    If you have any questions.you mayraise your hand now you will not be allowed to speak once the test has started.

                    Now look at Part A in your test booklet.

                    PartA

                    Directions:

                    You will hear lo short dialogues.For eachdialogue,there is one question and four possible answers.Choose the correctanswer—A,B,C or D,and mark it in your test booklet.YOu will have 15 seconds to answer the question and you willhear each dialogue only once.

                    1.What willthe man buy for his father’s birthday?

                    [A]A tie. [B]A shirt.

                    [C]A book. [D]A wallet.

                    2.What do weknow about Ted?

                    [A]He isa history teacher. [B]He is a geography teacher.

                    [C]He isthe woman’s neighbor.  [D]He is the woman’s colleague.

                    3.What doesthe woman suggest the man should do?

                    [A]Havea healthy diet.  [B]Get rid of his anger.

                    [C]Stopasking questions. [D]Keep his feelings back.

                    4.What do weknow about the cheese?

                    [A]It ison the shelf. [B]It is too expensive.

                    [C]It isin short supply.  [D]It is no longer flesh.

                    5.What doesthe man ask the woman to do?

                    [A]Answerthe phone for him.  [B]AskMr.Miller to phone later.

                    [C]AskMr.Miller to hold on a moment.[D]TellMr.Miller he will phone back later.

                    6.Why is thewoman in London?

                    [A]Sheis on holiday. [B]She is on a business trip.

                    [C]Sheis working for a company there.[D]She wants to establish a company there.

                    7.What do welearn about the woman’s sister from the dialogue?

                    [A]Shelikes watching football games.

                    [B]Sheis a fan of a local football team.

                    [C]Sheis a keen football player herself.

                    [D]Shelikes the local women football players.

                    8.Whathappened to the woman yesterday?

                    [A]Shewas almost cheated by a telephone call.

                    [B]Shegot a phone call from a special number.

                    [C]Shewas overcharged by the phone company.

                    [D]Sheprepared for her vacation with her friend.

                    9.Why does theman recommend rowing?

                    [A]Itrequires few professional skills.

                    [B]It exercises many parts of the body.

                    [C]It isa new item of fitness programs.

                    [D]It is popular with most club members.

                    10.What do weknow about the company?

                    [A]Itneeds new employees badly.

                    [B]It gives quick responses routinely.

                    [C]It isa newly established business.

                    [D]It is very cautious in decision。making.

                    Part B

                    Directions:

                    You willhear fourdialogues or monologues.Before listening to each one,you will have 5seconds

                    to readeach of the questions which accompany it.While listening,answer eachquestion by choosing A,B,C or D.After listening,you will have 10 seconds to check your answer to each question.You will .hear therecording only once.

                    Questions11—13 are based on a conversation between a woman and her neighbor.

                    11.What doesthe woman want the man to do for her?

                    [A]Deliverher package. [B]Sign for her package.

                    [C]Findthe property manager. [D]Talk to the property manager.

                    12.How long hasthe man lived in the apartment?

                    [A]Twodays. [B]One week.

                    [C]Sixmonths. [D]One year.

                    13.What problemdoes the woman have?

                    [A]Shehas run out of flour for baking cakes.

                    [B]Sheis ignorant of how to operate the stove.

                    [C]Somethingis going wrong with her stove.

                    [D]Somethingis going wrong with her timer.

                    Questions14~17 are based on the following conversation between a man and woman abouttaking a vacation.

                    14.What doesthe man think of Curacao?

                    [A]It isdifficult to reach.

                    [B]It is a tourist paradise.

                    [C]It isa perfect place for sports.

                    [D]It is an ordinary tropical island.

                    15.Why does thewoman hesitate to make her decision to go to Curacao?

                    [A]Shethinks it is too far.  [B]She thinks it is too crowded.

                    [C]It isnot safe to go there.

                    [D]It is not the right time to go there.

                    16.What is thewoman probably going to do?

                    [A]Packup for the trip. [B]Make her reservations.

                    [C]Bookher airline ticket.

                    [D]Contact her travel agent.

                    17.Who is thewoman talking to?

                    [A]Herfriend. [B]Her husband.

                    [C]Hertravel agent. [D]Her health advisor.

                    Questions18~21 are based on the following conversation about renting handba9.

                    18.Why does thewoman want to buy a handbag?

                    [A]Tocelebrate her birthday.

                    [B]To carry it on her wedding.

                    [C]Togive it to Mary as a gift.

                    D]To attend Mary’s wedding with it.

                    19.What do welearn about Handbag Hire?

                    [A]It isthe largest handbag dealer. [B]It is a famous handbag company.

                    [C]Itdesigns expensive handbags. [D]It specializes in renting handbags.

                    20.How will thewoman place her order?

                    [A]Bypost. [B]In person [C]Bytelephone.  [D]On the Internet.

                    21.How manydays will the woman have to wait for her order?

                    [A]2.  [B]3. [C] 4.  [D]5.

                    Questions22~25 are based on the following conversation on communwation.

                    22.What doesthe man think of good communication?

                    [A]Itstops people from hurting each other. [B]Itbrings glory to one’s career.

                    [C]Itimproves many situations.  [D]Itsolves all problems.

                    23.How does theman describe himself?

                    [A]Ill—tempered. [B]Agreeable. [C]Decisive. [D]Natural.

                    24.What isnecessary for a large group to make a final decision?

                    [A]Consultingwith other groups.  [B]Letting everyone have his say.

                    [C]Goingthrough a voting process.  [D]Reviewing past business activities.

                    25.What doesone have to do to be successful in business?

                    [A]Gethelp from other group members.  [B]Havethe patience to talk with people.

                    [C]Stopseeing the world in twisted ways.  [D]Sharetheir achieved results with others.

                    You have3 minutes to transfer your answers from your test booklet to ANSWER SHEET l.

                    That isthe end of Listening Comprehension.

                    SECTIONⅡ Use of English  (15minutes)

                    Directions:

                    Read thefollowing text.Choose the best word or phrase for each numbered blank and mark A,B,C,or D onANSWER SHEET 1.

                    Bluejeans are probably the single most representative article of American clothing.They were originally 26 by Jacob Davis,a tailor from Nevada, 27 ,together with dry-goods sales man Levi Strauss,patented theidea as 28 clothing for miners in l873.Blue jeaRs,also 29 as work clothing,spread among workersof all kinds in the late l9th and early 20th centuries, 30 among cowboys,farmers,loggers,and railroadworkers.During the 1950s, 31 Marion Brando and James Deanmade blue jeaRs 32 by wearing them in movies,and jeans be。came part ofthe 33 of teenagers’rebelling.In the l960sand 1970s,this fashion statement exploded as LevI’s 34 a fundamental part of the youth 35 focused on both civil rights and antiwar protests. 36 the late1970s,almost everyone inthe United States wore blue jear, 37 youths all around the world sought after them. 38 designers began to create more complicated 39 of blue jeaRs and to 40 their fit,jeaRs beganto express the American emphasis 41 informality and the importance of detail.By stressingthe right label and 42 the right look,blue jeans, 43 their worker origins,satirically。representedthe status consciousness of American fashion and the 44 to get close to the 45 fashion.In 1971,Levi Strauss&Co.received theCoty Fashion Critics’Award,the highest award of the American fashion industry.

                    26.[A]invented

                    [B]introduced

                    [C]developed

                    [D]delivered

                    27.[A]which

                    [B]where

                    [C]that

                    [D]who

                    28.[A]custom-made

                    [B]long-wearing

                    [C]well-tailored

                    [D]nice-looking

                    29.[A]realized

                    [B]accepted

                    [C]known

                    [D]identified

                    30.[A]especially

                    [B]normally [C]obviously

                    [D]exclusively

                    31.[A]cowboys

                    [B]actors

                    [C]writers

                    [D]directors

                    32.[A]economical

                    [B]typical

                    [C]fashionable

                    [D]valuable

                    33.[A]image

                    [B]figure

                    [C]picture

                    [D]character

                    34.[A]took

                    [B]played

                    [C]had

                    [D]became

                    35.[A]character

                    B]culture

                    [C]anxiety

                    [D]education

                    36.[A]Before

                    [B]Since

                    [C]By

                    [D]Till

                    37.[A]and

                    [B]so

                    [C]then

                    [D]for

                    38.[A]Although

                    [B]Until

                    [C]As

                    [D]Whereas

                    39.[A]styles

                    [B]examples

                    [C]sizes

                    [D]materials

                    40.[A]create

                    [B]adjust

                    [C]determine

                    [D]pursue

                    41.[A]about

                    [B]in

                    [C]of

                    [D]on

                    42.[A]maintaining

                    [B]improving

                    [C]expressing

                    [D]achieving

                    43.[A]besides

                    [B]despite

                    [C]except

                    [D]from

                    44.[A]anxiety [B]eagerness  [C]ambition  [D]promise

                    45.[A]tempor [B]grand [C]brightest  [D]latest

                    SECTION IIIReading Comprehension  (40minutes)

                    Part A

                    Directions·

                    Read thefollowing three texts.Answer the questions on each text by choosing A,B,C or D.Mark your answers on ANSWER SHEET。

                    Text 1  Back in the early 1990s,I knewlittle about computers beyond what it took to get through a workingday.But here’s what I did know:something huge washappening.It was stirring economies and imaginations and possibilities likenothing I had ever known.I knew the world was changing in ways that meant I shouldn’t counton old assumptions.And I knew I had dreams I still hadn’t fulfilled.But I didn’t knowhow to realize them until I met with my old friend,Rollys Rouse,when wehappened to move into the same neighborhood.

                    Rolly often called me with a stream of ideas.His rate ofidea production per second seemed al- most incredible.Soon we wereon the phone with each other every day.Talking about theInternet.

                    TalMng about starting a new onlinecompany-maybe together.

                    He was then developing a plan and he wanted me to be a part of it:we wouldgive people wonderful,whole electronic houses on a CD-ROM and let them modify those homesto their own needs.Try out different windows and doors,different paintcolors and furnishings.When they were satisfied,we would enable themto go online to make the project happen,to get the products

                    and the financing and the。professionaldesign and construction to help to do it outright.

                    BuildingBlocks was the name Rolly came up with for his new enterprise.Rolly tookthe plunge first.He simply dropped his profitable energy—consultingbusiness to commit himself full time to BuildingBlocks.I soonjoined him after I quit my well—paid job at a newspaper.

                    Together we developed a demo to show the features of our CD—ROM,“The NewAmerican Dream Home”.Then we took it to the annual convention of the National Associationof Home Builders in Boston.All the big companies were there showing off their。latestproducts.

                    To our delight,nearly everyone was eager to see what we were showing,.includingthe top executives of some enormous companies.When we left,we hadinvitations from them to come to their offices to tell them more aboutBuildingBlocks.

                    That was the start of my real lifetime dream and BuildBlocks,our company,has been prosperingever since.

                    46.By“somethinghuge was happening”,the writer refers to_________.

                    [A]housedesigning   [B]home decoration

                    [C]furnitureproduction [D]high-tech development

                    47.The textshows that Rolly Rouse is________.

                    [A]creative [B]cautious

                    [C]considerate [D]conservative

                    48.BuildingBtocksis a company that helps people to________.

                    [A]rentideal houses [B]buy ideal houses

                    [C]findideal houses [D]own ideal houses

                    49.Rolly andthe writer decided to start a company together because they were both________.

                    [A]expegin architecture  [B]underRaid at their jobs

                    [C]outof work at the time  [D]interested in e-business

                    50.At theBoston convention,Rolly and the writer were happy because_________.

                    [A]theyaroused people’s interest in their products

                    [B]theysold some of their own products right there

                    [C]theygot their first orders from some famous building firms

                    [D]theyhad the opportunity to visit some famous building firms

                  Text 2  

                  Anxiety disorders are common andrange from lo percent t0 20 percent of children and teens.Girl areusually more likely than boys to report anxiety symptoms or signs.Anxiety runsin families,due to a combination of inherent and environmental factors.Anxiousparents may produce anxiouschildren.When signs are so severe that they interfere with daily lifeactivities,it is time to seek an evaluation from a mental health professional.

                    Consider the following example of achild who suffered stress disorder.Maria,age l2,was at herphysician’s office awaiting her yearly checkup.A bullet from a gunbattle in the next building tore through the wall and struck her mother in theshoulder.severely wounding her.The mother was rushed to the hospital,but Maria did notknow her fate for several days.

                    Unable or unwilling to speak,visiblyanxious and fearful,Maria was evaluated by a child doctor in the Sallle hospital severaldays later.He recommended a brief treatment and began by taking Maria to hermother’s bedside.

                    Maria,reassured that hermother was alive,neveRheless could not be separated from her.During thefollowing weeks she insisted on sleeping with her mother and would not let herout of her

                    sight.Her motherwas equally shocked,and told her daughter she was suffering great pain.

                    The doctor began a series of playtreatment sessions using dolls and paly surgical instruments in which Mariaperformed operations in her doll hospital.She began to getgreat pleasure in her sessions.Her mother did not recover so quickly,so the doctorrecommended individual treatment for her.

                    The final sessions involved Mafiaperforming the operation on,not a doll,but her mother,who submitted to patient status once again.Playing outthe painful theme was extremely beneficial,and with a minimumof interpretation,both were back to their normal functioning by the month’s end.Maria didnot need any medication.

                    There are many ways of helpinganxious children cope with their fears and worries.A carefa,tevaluationand specific treatment plan can help these children get back on the path ofnormal development.

                    51.We learnfrom the text that anxiety in a family atmosphere is often________.

                    [A]analyzable

                    [B]unavoidable

                    [C]uncontrollable

                    [D]communicable

                    52.Peopleshould seek professional help when anxiety begins to________.

                    [A]appearin their kids

                    [B]affect their judgments

                    [C]appearin their families

                    [D]affect their life activities

                    53.According tothe text.Mafia suffered from stress disorder because_______.

                    [A]shewitnessed a gun battle

                    [B]she was wounded by a bullet

                    [C]sheworried about her mother

                    [D]she was scared of her checkup

                    54.Maria wastaken to her mother’s bedside in the hospital to_______.

                    [A]start her initial treatment

                    [B]keep her mom in her sight

                    [C]sleeptogether with her mom

                    [D]help with her mom’s recovery

                    55.To help allanxious kid out,it is suggested to_______.

                    [A]toleratehis fears and worries

                    [B]point out his normal grow path

                    [C]puthim in a particular treatment

                    [D]ask him to make a self-evaluation

                  Text 3  

                  Lately,presidentsof some American universities have added inflation to their worry list.They are notconcemed about inflation of prices,but of academicgrades.Larry Summers,president of Harvard.recentlycaused a storm when he told one of the university’s professors he didn’t likegrade inflation.

                    Insiders say that nearly half thegrades Harvard awards have lately been A or A minus—a lot moreman in the l980s.Is this trend a bad thing,in fact2 And is thisgrade inflation really“inflation”?

                    To take the second question first,the answeris N0,not stricdy speaking.”Inflation”in grades ought to mean that work of a given standardwould be awarded an ever higher grade,year by year.Thehighest permissible grade would therefore have to keep rising in a ceaselessprocesslon of non-improvement.Because in reality the top grade is fixed,the processis not so much grade inflation as grade compression.This isworse:a distortion in relative prices is more confusing than a uniformupward drift.Grade compression squeezes information out of the system.

                    But is grade inflation necessarily a bad thing?Theanswer depends on who you are.When students leave Harvard,they carry grades as a sort of currency:a pocketfulof intellectual capital,to bid for jobs or places in graduate schools against graduates fromother universities with other currencies.These positions goto those who can put the most academic cash on the table。Employersandgraduate schools must decide on the exchange rate,as it were,between aHarvard C student

                    and an A student from a less distinguishedplace.

                    Again.overall gradeinflation-the uniform devaluation of the students’ capital-would be telativelyeasy to cope with,working in principle neither to the advantage or disadvantage ofHarvard

                    graduates. Recruiters.in aposition to see the market for graduates as a whole,would simplyadjust their exchange rate.Compression,however,hasdistributional consequences.The best Harvard students see their grades devalued relativeto those of second.rate Harvard students.That is bad with respect to encouraging students to workharder.

                    56.The text talksabout the recent storm concerning grade inflation in American universities by focusingon_________.

                    [A]itscauses

                    [B]its features

                    [C]itsimpacts

                    [D]its purposes

                    57.In thewriter’s opinion,real grade inflation can occur when the highest permissible grade_______

                    [A]israised accordingly

                    [B]is cautiously granted

                    [C]isstrictly administered

                    [D]is limited appropriately

                    58.The writerthinks that grade compression characterizes________.

                    [A]ajust policy in evaluation

                    [B]a distorted grading system

                    [C]afixed criterion for the work done

                    [D]a relative difference among students

                    59.As far asjob—seeking is concerned,Harvard grade inflation will benefit________.

                    [A]itsbest graduates

                    [B]its ordinary graduates

                    [C]thejob recruiters

                    [D]the school authorities

                    60.With gradeinflation going on in Harvard,it is likely that________.

                    [A]itsbest students will lack the urge to make progress

                    [B]itsranking in the US universities will going down

                    [C]itsadvantages will be overtaken by its disadvantages

                    [D]itssystem of school score distribution will be in chaos

                  PartB  

                  Directions:

                    Read thetexts in which five people are commenting on a magazine article called“The GlobalFishCrisis”。For question61 to 65,match the name of each person(61 to 65)to one of the statements(A toG)given below. Mark your answers ANSWER SHEET.

                    Tom Hagen:

                    I am acommercial fisherman in Alaska.It was an eye—opener to see the destruction and waste in theworld’s fisheries.The Alaska salmon fishery is very well managed,and we don’tsee the destruction occurring elsewhere.Many local peoplecomplain of the many restrictive laws in the fish- cry,but afterreading this article,I’m in favor of even stricter regulation.The sea isthe basis for life on Earth,and we must take care of it.

                    Jimmy O’Brien:

                    You didn’ttouch the fishing here in the U.S.where the fisherman is working under the harshest regulations onEarth and the strictest equipment restrictions.We are fishing in afashion that is completelyenvironmentally friendly as required under the Magnuson-Stevens Act.The U.S.keeps importingmore fish from countries that have no requirements on equipment or on theircatch.U.S.fishermen cannot compete with foreign prices so the fishermen’snumbers have been reduced.

                    Tiffany Miller:

                    I wasshocked at the utter lack of regard that the commercial fishing industry hasfor its very ownresources.I’d like to ask these same fishermen who say that they cannot make aliving on the catchlimits set for them:How are you going to make a living when all the fish are gone?

                    Nathan Kennedy:

                    Youfailed to note the obvious root cause of the global fish crisis,which is notnew technologies but the explosion of world population.There simplyare not enough fish in the ocean to feed US,and all thefishefies management and conservation in the world will do nothing to stopoverfishing if nothing is done to stem the unsupportable demand for humanconsumption.

                    Peter Paul:

                    As aperson with some 35 years of membership in various conservation groups,and afterwriting thousands of emails,letters,and protest forms,I arrived at the sad Conclusion that nothing I did mattered one bit.When thecatch drops below the cost of operating expenses,the industry willdie,taking the health of the ocean with it.We will thenall,stand back and wonder why we let it happen

                    Nowmatch the name of each person(61 to 65)to the appropriate statement.

                    Note:there aretwo extra statements.

                    Statements

                    61.TomHagen

                    62.Jinmay O’Bfien

                    63.TiffanyMiller

                    64.NathanKennedy

                    65.PeterPaul

                    [A]Overfishing results fromextensive use of new technologies.

                    [B]Many people in my place support stricterregulation on fishing.

                    [C]I think that you failed topoint out the real reason for overfishing.

                    [D]We are in a very weakposition to compete with other countdes in fishing.

                    [E]Sooner or later,we will feelregretful about out current fishing practice.

                    [F]I didn’t know there weresuch damaging ways of fishing around the world.

                    [G]1 wonder if those fishermenhave ever considered the consequences of exhausting ocean resources.

                    SECTION IV Writing

                    (40minutes)

                    Directions:

                    Youshould write your responses to both Part A and Part B of this section on ANSWERSHEET 2.

                    Part A

                    66.You haveread the following advertisement about a volunteer program for allinternational

                    sportsgame.You want to get in touch with the organizer.

                  Volunteers Wanted

                    Tasks:interpreting,guiding,reception work,medical aid,driving,etc.

                    Good level of English required.

                    Contact US at volunteerswanted@gamil.com

                    Write anemail to the organizer,telling about

                    1)yourinterest in the program;

                    2)yourqualifications for the task;

                    3)yourtime available for the task.

                    Youshould write about l00 words.Do not sign your own name at the end of your email.

                    Use“Wang Lin”instead.

                    Part B

                    67.Below is apicture showing that the community newspaper board is covered by advertisements.Look at thepicture and write an essay of about 120 words making reference to the

                    followingtwo points:

                    1)whatthe problem is and what causes the problem;

                    2)how toimprove the situation.


                  參考答案及精析

                    第一部分聽力理解  【答案】

                    1.A 2.D 3.B 4.D 5.C 6.B 7.C

                    8.A 9.B l0.A 11.B 12.A l3.C l4.B

                    15.A 16.D 17.A 18.D 19.D 20.D 21.A

                    22.C 23.C 24.B 25.D

                    【聽力部分錄音材料】  Part A

                    1.W:What a fantastictie you’ve got,Adam!

                    M:Thanks.It’s abirthday gift from my wife.

                    W:It goes sowell with your shirt.

                    M:1 wasthinking of giving my father a wallet or a book on his birthday.But it seemsthat a tie is a better choice.

                    2.M:Great party,isn’t it?Tedand Jane always have great parties.

                    W:But this ismy first.I only met Ted yesterday.

                    He and Iteach at the salile sch001.

                    M:Oh,you’re ateacher?What do you teach?

                    W:History,andGeography.

                    3.W:Youlook so angry.what happened?

                    M:Nothing,I’d rather nottalk about it.Just don’t ask.

                    W:Come on.I think youneed to let off some anger.Not have your feelings held back like that.

                    It’ll eat your life.

                    4.M:What’s theproblem?

                    W:This cheesehas gone bad.It’s past the sale by date.I bought it in thisshop yesterday.

                    M:Well,that’snot really our fault.The supplier is responsible.

                    W:But you soldit in your shop.I’d like to get my money back,please.

                    5.W:Stanley,there is aMr.Miller on the phone who wants to talk to you.

                    M:I’m busy atthe moment.Can you ask him to hold?Tell him I’ll talk with him in a few seconds.

                    W:Sure,he’s on Line2.

                    M:Thanks,Jane.

                    6.M:Are youstaying long?

                    W:No,unfortunatelyonly a couple of weeks.

                    M:On business or on holiday?

                    W:Business,I’m afraid.My companyis setting up all office in London.

                    7.W:My sister isreally keen on soccer.

                    M:Really?Whatteam does she support?

                    W:Not any inparticular.She is an enthusiastic player.She’s on the localwomen’s team.

                    M:Well.If that’sthe case,you really must take me to seeher play sometimes.

                    8.W:I was almostfooled by a telephone call yesterday.

                    M:What’s itabout?

                    W:A week’svacation for two.But I realized it was a cheat when they told me to ring a specialtelelghone number to claim the price.

                    M:WeD,thosecalls are charged at unbelievably high

                    9.M:I’d like torecommend an extremely efficient work-outmachine at this fitness club.

                    W:Great!I needyour professional advice.

                    M:The rowingmachine.So many people just ignore

                    it,but it’s afull body exercise.It combines strength training with the heart.

                    10.W:Hi,Mark!I heardyou just had all interview for a newjob?How did it go?

                    M:I think Idid well:They said they’d make a decision by this Friday.W:ThisFriday?It looks like they want to hire the person as quickly as possible.

                    Part B  Questions11—13

                    W:Hi,I’m Sally.I live inthe Apartment 324,right next door.1 was wondering if you could do a favor for me.I’mexpecting a package to be delivered,but now I have to goto the property manager.Could you sign the package and hold it for me?

                    M:Of course.I would behappy to help you out.By the way,I’m John.I moved in here two clays ago.It’s nice to meet you.

                    W:I’ve beenliving here for six months.

                    M:Would youlike to come in for a cup of coffee?

                    W:N0,thanks.I need to talk to the property manager about some problems with my apartment.

                    M:What troubleare you having?

                    W:My electricstove gets too hot.I baked a cake yesterday.After only fiveminutes,the cake was as

                    hard asa brick.I had the temperature set right.M:Somethingmust be going wrong with it.You’d better talk to the property manager,and get it repaired

                    as soonas possible.

                    W:OK.I have to gonow.I really appreciate your help.I’m glad thatyou moved in next door to me.

                    I’ll bake acake as a housewarming gift as soon as my stoveis working.

                    M:Sounds great.Well,I’11 see youlater.

                    W:Bye for now.

                    Questions14-17

                    W:I reallyneed a vacation.I just can’t decide where to go.

                    M:Have youever been to Curacao?

                    W:No,I haven’t.It’s so far.

                    M:Ohm,comeon!In this day and age,nothing is far.

                    Besides,once you getthere,it’s like being in paradise.I really think youshould consider it.In fact,I suggestyou ask your travel agent about it.W:What’s so。great aboutCuracao?It’s just another tropicalisland with.a pretty beach.

                    M:Just anothertropical island?Bright sunny days with blue water rolling upon to the cleanwhite sand.

                    Gentle winds blowing through the palm trees of clear move at night.Come on!It’s atremendous place to go.

                    W:Oh,I don’t know.

                    M:Look!You cango wherever you want.But it’s important that you relax during your vacation.And Curacaois the perfect,place for that.I mean,you can do all the things you like to d0.Play tennis,swim,

                    read,rest,not tomention eat well and get a great suntan.Why are you sohesitant? Come on! Be adventurous.

                    W:You’re certainlymaking it sound better by the minute.OK.maybe l’11 check itout wim my travel agent.

                    M:I suggestyou hurry.This is a very busy time of the

                    year.Andreservations area’t always easy to get.

                    And itis absolutely necessary that you have reservations.

                    Questionsl8—21

                    w:John,shall we goto Sun Store?I have decided to

                    buy thatMurrberry handba9.Anyway,I’m not carrying this one to Mary’s wedding.M:But,Jane,why not rentone with Handbag Hire?Instead of$990.pay$50.and you haveit for a whole week.

                    W:Sounds great,but I neverknew I can rent a handbag.M:Handbag Hire is a new business.It was founded twomonths ago.Its collection covers many designer handbags.

                    W:So…for theprice of one Murrberry,I can use a different bag each week for twenty weeks?

                    M:Absolutely.And if you likeone of them,you can choose to buy it at a discounted rate.Of coursethe

                    pricevaries by age and condition.For example,a $1500 Murrberry bag can sell for just$750.

                    W:Great.but how do Irent?By telephone?Or in person? M:Either.And more conveniently,it accepts online orders.W:I’ll do it online now.I still have one more question.Mary"s wedding isnext Saturday.There are only five days left.Do I have enoughtime?

                    M:Don’t worry.It promisesthat customers receive their orders by post within two days.Three more.days to go.

                    W:Oh,I’d betterorder one right now.

                    Questions22—25

                    w:Somebodyonce said that good communication can solve any problem.Do you agreewith this?

                    M:I think thatgood communication can solve a lot of problems,and improve many asituation.1 worked

                    in someseemingly impossible situations,and saw people change dramatically all because they started

                    communicatingin better ways.But can good communication solve all problems?N0.It can’t stop

                    somepeople from seeing the world in twisted ways.

                    It call’t stop somepeople from humng themselves.

                    W:What kind ofpeople do you have difficulty working with?

                    M:I’m naturallya person who likes to be decisive,and to act.SO I get impatient sometimes when I’m

                    workingwith a large group.Because it takes time for everyone’S voice tO be heard,and foreveryone’s

                    opinionto be aired.Yet I know that process is vital if they’re going toreach the ultimate decision.

                    W:Is successof business based more on the results of what you do,or on howyou communicate what you’ve done?

                    M:Oh,it’S acombination of both.To be successful,you have to be able tO achieve results.But you also

                    have tobe able to communicate what you achieve.The most successfulpeople don’t place glory on

                    themselves,but ratheron people who help them achieve success.

                    第二部分英語知識運用

                    參考譯文

                    藍色牛仔褲可能是美國人最具代表性的一件衣服。藍色牛仔褲最初是由來自美國內華達州的一位裁縫——雅各布·戴維斯發明的,他和紡織商李維·施特勞斯合作,于l873年將這一發明申請為專利,并為礦工提供了一種經久耐穿的衣服。藍色牛仔褲,也被稱作工作服,在19世紀末及20世紀初流行于美國各行各業的工人階層,尤其受牛仔、農夫、伐木工及鐵路工人的喜愛。20世紀50年代,演員馬龍·白蘭度和詹姆斯·迪恩在電影中都穿著藍色牛仔褲,這使得藍色牛仔褲一下子變得時髦起來。后來,牛仔褲還成了叛逆年輕人形象的一部分。20世紀六七十年代,李維斯成為關注民權運動和反戰運動的青年文化的重要組成部分,其時尚宣言也迅速流行起來。到20世紀70年代末,美國幾乎所有人都穿藍色牛仔褲,同時全世界的年輕人都在追逐這一潮流。隨著服裝設計師設計的款式更加多樣,更加合身,藍色牛仔褲很好地表現了美國人對隨意的強調以及對細節的重視。藍色牛仔褲,盡管起源于工人階層,但通過突顯品牌和實現美觀,諷刺性地代表了美國當代的時尚意識和追求最新潮流的急切愿望。1971年,李維斯公司榮獲美國時尚界最高獎項——柯蒂時裝評論獎。

                    26.A【精析】本題考查動詞詞義辨析。invent發明;introduce引進;develop發展;deriver遞交。后文提到“他和紡織商李維·施特勞斯合作,于1873年將這一發明申請為專利”,由此推知,此處是說“藍色牛仔褲最初是由雅各布·戴維斯發明的”,故選A。

                    27.D【精析】本題考查關系代詞詞義辨析。which代指物;where代指地點;that代指物或者人,但不能引導非限制性定語從句;who代指人。前文提到美國內華達州的一位裁縫——雅各布·戴維斯,推知此處是說,“他和紡織商李維·施特勞斯合作”,即此處的關系代詞代指的是前文的雅各布·戴維斯,故選D。

                    28.B 【精析】本題考查復合形容詞詞義辨析。custom—made顧客定制的;long—wearing經久耐

                    穿的;well—tailored精心剪裁的;nice—looking漂亮好看的。后文提到這種衣服是為礦工做的,從礦工的工作環境推知,這種衣服的特點是“經久耐穿的”,故選B。

                    29.C 【精析】本題考查動詞詞義辨析。realize意識,實現;accept接受;know知道,稱作;idenfify識別。根據前文“藍色牛仔褲”和后文“工“作服”可知,后文是對前文更為具體通俗的解釋,含義上是等同的,故選c。30.A【精析】本題考查副詞詞義辨析。especially尤其地;normally正常地;0bviously明顯地;exclusively專有地。前文提到,藍色牛仔褲流行于美國各行各業的工人階層,此處專門指出幾個不同工種的工人,故選A。

                    31.B【精析】本題考查名詞詞義辨析。cowboy牛仔;actor演員;writer作家;director導演。后文提到有人在電影中穿著這種款式的褲子,可推知此處是說“演員馬龍·白蘭度和詹姆斯·迪恩”,故選B。

                    32.C【精析】本題考查形容詞詞義辨析。economical經濟的;typical典型的;fashionable流行的;valuable重要的。前半句中提到著各演員在電影中穿藍色牛仔褲,可推知此處是說“牛仔褲走上銀屏之后成為一種時尚了”,故選C。33.A【精析】本題考查名詞詞義辨析。image形象;figure輪廓,體形;picture圖片;character人物。前文提到牛仔褲走上銀屏之后成為一種時尚,由此可推知,牛仔褲受到叛逆青年的追捧,成為了他們“形象”的一部分,故選A。

                    34.D【精析】本題考查上下文語義的銜接。take帶走;play玩耍;have有;become成為。前文提

                    到牛仔褲成了叛逆年輕人形象的一部分,后文又提到青年人關注民權運動和反戰運動,可推知,當時參與了這一系列運動的年輕人很多都穿李維斯的牛仔褲,即李維斯“成為”了這些運動的重要組成部分,故選D。

                    35.B【精析】本題考查名詞詞義辨析。character人物;culture文化;anxiety焦慮;education教育。后文提到“關注民權運動和反戰運動”,它們都屬亍青年文化的內容,故選B。

                    36。c 【精析】本題考查介詞詞義辨析。before在…之前;since自從…開始;by截止到…;till直到…。

                    根據后文的時間狀語以及“美國幾乎所有人都穿藍色牛仔褲”,可推知此處是說“截止到某一個時間點為止”,故選c。

                    37.A【精析】本題考查連詞詞義辨析。and并且,而且;S0因此;then然后;for因為。根據前半句“美國幾乎所有人都穿藍色牛仔褲”和后半句“全世界的年輕人都在追逐這一潮流”,可推知此處需要一個表示并列關系的連詞,故選A。

                    38.C【精析】本題考查連詞詞義辨析。although雖然;until直到;as隨著;whereas盡管。根據后文“藍色牛仔褲很好地表現了美國人對隨意的強調以及對細節的重視”可以推知,此處表示的意思是“隨著”服裝設計師技術的提高,故選C。

                    39.A【精析】本題考查名詞詞義辨析。style款式,風格,example例子;size型號;material原料。前文提到了“隨著服裝設計師開始設計…”,后文提到了“藍色牛仔褲很好地表現了美國人對隨意的強調以及對細節的重視”,由此可推知此處表示的是,設計師設計的牛仔褲款式更為多樣,故選A。

                    40.B【精析】本題考查動詞詞義辨析。create創造;adjust調整;determine決定;pursue追求。前文提到了“設計師設計的牛仔褲款式多樣”,后文又提到“美國人對細節的重視”,細節更多體現在服裝的剪裁上,由此可推知,此處表示的是設計師設計出的牛仔褲更加合身,故選B。

                    41.D【精析】本題考查介詞詞義辨析。about關于…;in在…內;0f屬于…;0n在…上。前文中的emphasis作為一個名詞,表示強調,后文的“informality and the importance of detail”表示所強調的具體兩個方面,故選D。

                    42.D【精析】本題考查動詞詞義辨析。maintain保持;improve改善;express表達;achieve實現。根據前文“突顯品牌”可推知,此處表示的是“實現美觀”,以表達出其所追求的一個整體效果,故選D。

                    43.B 【精析】本題考查介詞詞義辨析。besides除…之外;despite盡管;except不包括…;from來自…。由前半句的“起源于工人階層”以及后文的“代表了美國當代的時尚意識”可推知,前后有一個反差存在,因此此處表示的意思應為“盡管起源于工人階層”,故選8。

                    44.B【精析】本題考查名詞詞義辨析。anxiety焦慮;eagerness急切;ambition雄心;promise許諾。前文提到“代表了美國當代的時尚意識”,由此可推知,后文應是對這一意識的進一步說明,eagerness表示迫切追求潮流的心情,故選B。

                    45.D【精析】本題考查形容詞詞義辨析。temporary臨時的;grand宏大的;brightest最明亮的;latest最新的。后文指出李維斯榮獲美國時尚界最高獎項——柯蒂時裝評論獎,由此可推知,此處表示“追逐最新的潮流”,故選D。

                    第三部分閱讀理解

                    Part A

                    Text 1

                    參考譯文

                    回想起20世紀90年代初,我對電腦一無所知。在用電腦工作了一天之后,我才對其有所了解。但我知道:巨大的變化即將發生,即激動人心的經濟、想象力及各種前所未有的事情。我知道世界正在變化,也就是說,我不能靠著過去的經驗過活。我也知道我有很多未實現的夢想。但我是在遇到我的老朋友羅林·勞斯之后,才意識到如何實現我的那些夢想,那時我倆剛巧搬到了同一個社區。

                    羅林總是說我滿腦子主意。但他每秒鐘所產生的想法的數量似乎也非常不可思議。很快,我們每天打電話聊天,談論互聯網的一些事情,商討一起開一家新網絡公司的可能性。

                    緊接著,他開始制定計劃,并想讓我也參與其中:我們將在只讀光盤驅動上為人們提供豐富的、全套的電子房間,并讓人們根據自己的需求裝飾自己的房子。他們可以嘗試多種門窗、不同的漆色和家具。當他們感到滿意時,我們就讓他們去網上實現自己的規劃。購買產品及專業的設計和建筑,我們將幫助他們實現規劃。

                    “BuildingBlocks”是羅林為新公司起的名字。羅林決定自己先冒險試試。他直接將其利潤豐厚的能

                    源咨詢業拋下,全身心投入到“BuildingBlocks”公司中。我辭去了報社待遇豐厚的工作后,很快加入了他。我們一起開發出一款小樣,展示了我們只讀光盤驅動的特點——全新美國夢想家園。我們將其帶到波士頓全美住宅商協會的年度會議上。所有大公司都在那里展示、炫耀自己的最新產品。

                    令我們高興的是,包括一些大公司的高管在內,幾乎每個人都想看看我們所展示的產品。離開會場

                    時,我們已經收到很多邀請,他們都希望我們能去他們的辦公室并為其介紹更多有關“BuildingBlocks”公司的產品。那只是我人生夢想邁出的第一步,我們的公司“BuildingBlocks”,從此以后也逐漸興旺發達。

                    46.D 【精析】推理題。根據第一段第一句“Backin the early 1990s I knew little about computers

                    beyondwhat it took to get through a working—day.”和第三句“It wasstirring economies and imaginations and possibilities like nothing I had everknown.”可知,前后文講的主要是技術帶來的影響,由此可以推知巨大的變化指的是高科技的發展,故選D。

                    47.A 【精析】細節題。根據第二段“Hisrate of idea production per second seemed almost incredible.”可知,“他每秒鐘所產生的想法似乎也非常不可思議”,由此可以推知羅林很有創造力,故選A。

                    48.D 【精析】推理題。根據第三段第二、三句“Try…When theywere satisfied,we would enable

                    them togo online to make the project happen,to get the productsand the financing and the professional design and construction to help to do itoutright.”可知,“他們可以嘗試…。當他們感到滿意時,我們就讓他們去網上實現自己的規劃,購買產品及專業的設計和建筑,我們將幫助他們實現規劃。”即這一系列動作的結果就是“幫助人們擁有一個理想的房子”,故選D。

                    49.D 【精析】推理題。根據第四段第三、四句“Hesimply dropped his profitable energy—consulting

                    businessto commit himself full time to BuildingBlocks.I soon joined himafter I quit my well-paid job at a newspaper.”可知,“他直接將其利潤豐厚的能源咨詢業拋下,全身心投入到‘BuildingBlocks’公司中。我辭去了報社待遇豐厚的工作后,很快加入了他。”由此可見,兩個人都擁有一份收入較高的工作,為了共同的興趣,他們紛紛辭職,故選D。

                    50.A 【精析】細節題。根據最后一段第一句“To ourdelight,nearly everyone was eager to see what wewere showing…”可見大家對他們的產品很感興趣,故選A。

                    Text 2

                    參考譯文

                    焦慮障礙很普遍,在兒童和青少年中,患該疾病的比例從l0%到20%不等。一般情況下,女孩比男孩更容易出現焦慮癥狀或征兆。焦慮是由內在因素和環境因素共同造成的,因此有家族遺傳現象。如果父母患有焦慮,生出來的孩子很可能也患有焦慮。一旦焦慮癥狀非常明顯,妨礙了日常活動,就需要找一個心理健康專家進行治療了。

                    來看看下面這個患有壓力心理障礙孩子的例子。12歲的瑪麗亞正在她醫生的辦公室等著她每年的常規檢查。隔壁大廈槍擊案中的子彈穿過了墻,打在她媽媽的肩膀上,媽媽受傷很嚴重,立即被送到醫院。然而,接下來的幾天瑪麗亞都不知道媽媽的命運。

                    瑪麗亞不能或者不愿意講話,幾天以后,同一家醫院的醫生診斷其具有很明顯的焦慮恐懼癥狀。醫生建議對其進行短暫的治療,并首先把她帶到了媽媽的床邊。

                    瑪麗亞看到媽媽還活著,放心了,但不能和媽媽分開。接下來的幾周,她堅持睡在媽媽身邊,不讓媽媽離開她的視線。她的媽媽同樣感到很震驚,并告訴女兒她正在忍受巨大的痛苦。

                    醫生開始利用玩偶對瑪麗亞進行一系列的游戲治療,在此期間瑪麗亞在她的玩偶醫院里通過使用手術工具對玩偶進行了手術。她在治療中獲得了極大的樂趣。她的媽媽恢復的沒有那么快,因此醫生建議對其進行單獨治療。

                    在最后一期治療中,瑪麗亞要進行手術的,不是玩偶,而是她的媽媽,媽媽扮演的是再次回到生病的

                    狀態。演繹受傷主題非常有益。不用多做解釋,月底時,兩個人都恢復正常了:此后,瑪麗亞不再需要任何藥物治療。

                    有許多方法可以幫助患有焦慮障礙的孩子面對恐懼和擔心。仔細的診斷和特殊的治療計劃能幫助這些孩子回到正常成長的軌道上。

                    51.A【精析】推理題。根據第一段第四句“Anxious parents may produce anxious children.”可知.“如果父母患有焦慮,生出來的孩子很可能也患有焦慮。”由此可知,焦慮在一個家庭中可以分析得出,故選A。

                    52.D【精析】細節題。根據第一段最后一句“When signs are so severe that they interfere with daily lifeactivities,it is time to seek an evaluation from a mental health professional.”可知,“一旦焦慮癥狀非常明顯,妨礙了日常活動,就需要找一個心理健康專家進行治療了。”由此可知,影響到正常生活后,就要尋求專業人士的幫助,故選D。

                    53.C【精析】推理題。根據第四段第一、二句“Maria,reassured that her mother was alive,nevertheless couldnot be separated from her...she insisted on sleeping with her mother and would not let her outof sight.”可知,她的壓力來自于害怕失去媽媽,擔心媽媽的身體健康,故選C。

                    54.A【精析】細節題。根據文中第三段最后一句“He recommended a brief treatment and began by taking Maria to hermother’S bedside.”可知,瑪麗亞來到媽媽的身邊最初是因為醫生要對其進行初步的治療,故選A。

                    55.C【精析】細節題。由全文最后一段可知,仔細的診斷和特殊的治療計劃能幫助患有焦慮癥的孩子。故選C。

                    Text3 。

                    參考譯文

                    最近,美國部分高校的校長將“通脹”列到了其擔心列表上。他們所擔心不是物價的通脹,而是學分的通脹。哈佛大學校長拉里·薩摩斯最近告訴該校一住大學教授他不喜歡學分通脹,因此引發了一場風波。內部人士說哈佛大學的成績獎幾乎一半都是A或者A一,這樣的一個比例比20世紀80年代時高很多。但這樣的趨勢事實上是壞事兒嗎?這樣的學分通脹真的是“通脹”嗎?先回答第二個問題,從并不嚴格的意義上講,答案是否定的。學分“通脹”應該意味著同一水準的成績獲得的學分逐年增高。因此,在沒有改善、提高的情況下,允許學生獲得的最高學分應該不斷上升。然而在現實中,最高學分是固定的,因此這個過程不是學分增值而是學分貶值。這個更糟:相對價格的扭曲比統一上浮更加令人困惑。學分貶值讓學生學到的知識越來越少,從而令整個教育系統的知識量逐漸減少,甚至匱乏。

                    那么學分通脹就一定是壞事兒嗎?答案取決你是哪所學校畢業的學生。從哈佛畢業的學生,他們將學分看成是一種貨幣:滿兜的智力資本,他們用它同畢業于其他院校的、拿著其他貨幣的學生競爭工作崗位或所申請的研究生院。只有那些將最多的學術現金放到案上的人才可能得到這些職位。雇主和各大研究生院必須決定匯率,即他們必須考慮是選擇一個哈佛畢業但只獲得c的學生還是選擇一個學校并不那么出名卻獲得A的學生。

                    總體再看一下學分通脹——學生資本的集體貶值——將相對容易理解,它基本上既不是哈佛畢業生的優勢也不是他們的劣勢。招聘人員,站在自己的角度,會把畢業生作為一個整體來看,唯一的差別僅僅是調整匯率的問題。然而,學分貶值呈現出了區域性分布的結果。和哈佛大學二流學生相比,哈佛大學一流的學生認為他們的學分貶值了。這對于鼓勵學生努力學習這一點,影響不是很好。

                    56.C【精析】推理題。分析全文的結構可知,前兩段提出了學分通脹的問題,第三段的第二句和第三句簡要說明了學分通脹的原因,即:學分“通脹”應該意味著同一水準的成績獲得的學分逐年增高。因此,在沒有改善、提高的情況下,允許學生獲得的最高學分在不斷上升。然而在現實中,最高學分是固定的,因此這個過程不是學分增值而是學分貶值。緊接著,該文又分析了學分通脹所產生的影響:相對價格的扭曲比統一上浮更加令人困惑;學分貶值讓學生學到的知識越來越少,從而令整個教育系統的知識量減少,甚至匱乏。文章的第四段和第五段也是對學分通脹所產生的影響的分析,包括對學生就業和繼續學習的影響,故選c。

                    57.A【精析】細節題。根據第三段第二句“‘Inflation’in grades ought to mean that work of a given standard would beawarded an ever higher grade,year by year.”內容可知,學分通脹意味著同一水準的成績獲得的學分逐年增高,因此,在作者看來,最高學分提高時會發生學分通脹,故選A。

                    58.B【精析】推理題。根據第三段最后兩句“That is worse:a distortion in relative prices is more

                    confusingthan a uniform upward drift.Grade compression squeezes information OUt of the system.”可知,相對價格的扭曲比統一上浮更加令人困惑。學分貶值讓學生學到的知識越來越少,從而令整個教育系統的知識量逐漸減少,甚至匱乏。由此可推知,作者認為學分貶值的特征就是一個扭曲的評分體系,故選B。

                    59.B【精析】推理題。根據文章第四段內容可知,雇主在錄取人員時,會考慮選擇一個哈佛畢業但只獲得c的學生,還是選擇一個學校并不那么出名卻獲得A的學生,由此可推知,哈佛成績一般的學生在找工作時更能從學分通脹中獲益,故選8。

                    60.A【精析】細節題。根據最后一段最后兩句“The best Hagvard students see their grades devalued relativeto those of second.rate Harvard.That is bad with respect to encouraging students to work harder.”可知,哈佛大學學分通脹讓優秀學生喪失了不斷進步的動力,故選A。

                    Part B

                    參考譯文

                    下面這段文字是5個人對于一篇雜志文章《世界漁業危機》所作的評論。

                    湯姆·哈根:

                    我是阿拉斯加的一名商業漁夫。看到世界上漁業所受的破壞和污染真是大開眼界。阿拉斯加鮭魚業經營得非常好,在那里我們看不到任何的破壞。許多當地人抱怨對捕魚業的諸多限制法律,但讀完這篇

                    文章后,我對嚴格的條文非常贊成。海洋是地球上的生命賴以生存的基礎。我們必須保護它。

                    吉米·奧勃良:

                    你在美國不會涉足捕魚業,因為這里的漁夫執行著世界上最嚴格的捕魚法律及捕魚設備限制。根據麥格納森·史蒂文森漁業保育管理法的相關規定,我們是在當下比較流行的提法——友好型的環境下進行捕魚的。美國一直從那些對捕魚設備或捕獲量沒有嚴格限制的國家進口大量的魚產品。美國漁民無法和國外的價格競爭,因此漁民的數量逐漸減少。

                    蒂芙尼·米勒:

                    看至商業捕魚業完全忽視其自身資源,我感到很震驚。一些漁民說由于其捕撈量受限,他們很難生存,那么,我想問問他們:如果所有的魚類都滅絕了,你們將如何生存呢?

                    內森·肯尼迪:

                    你可能沒有注意到全球漁業危機的根本原因:不是新技術的出現,而是人口的爆炸性增長,僅僅是因為海洋中的魚已經無法滿足人類的需求。如果沒有任何措施來根除人類對魚類消費的無限需求,那世界上所有漁業管理和保護法對于過度捕撈都將束手無策。

                    皮特·保羅:

                    作為一個在多種保護組織中擁有35年之久會員身份的人,我曾寫過數以千計的郵件、信件,并進行過多種其他形式的抗議,但最后,我得出了一個可悲的結論:我所做的事沒有起到任何作用。一旦捕魚量低于營業成本,這個行業就會消失,海洋的健康也一并被摧毀。屆時,我們將全都無奈地站在一邊,想著為什么會發生這樣的事情。

                    61.F 【精析】主旨題。湯姆·哈根對世界上漁業所受的破壞和污染感到十分震驚。這與F項“我沒有想到世界上對捕魚業有各種破壞的方法”表示的意思相同。故選F。

                    62.D 【精析】主旨題。吉米·奧勃良提到美國漁民捕魚時受到的諸多限制,因此相對來說,美國魚類價格較高,無法與國外不受嚴格限制的魚類價格競爭。這與D項“和其他國家的捕魚業相比,我們所處的地位相對比較弱”表示的意思相同,故選D。

                    63.G 【精析】主旨題。蒂芙尼·米勒認為過渡捕撈終有一天將使魚類滅絕,漁民也將很難生存。這與G項“我在想漁民是否想過耗盡海洋資源的后果”表示的意思相同,故選G。

                    64.c 【精析】主旨題。一內森·肯尼迪認為全球魚類危機的根源在于人口爆炸性的增長,而不是新技術的出現,文章并沒有指出這一點,這與C項“我認為這篇文章沒有指出過度捕撈的真正原因”表示的意思相同,故選C。

                    65.E 【精析】主旨題。皮特·保羅分析了魚量減產后,其對整個捕魚業及海洋所帶來的厄運,而

                    屆時人們只能眼睜睜無奈地看著,并在想其中的原因,這與E項“遲早有一天,我們會對自己現行的捕撈方式后悔的”表示的意思相同,故選E。

                    第四部分寫作

                    Part A

                    66.【高分范文】

                    Dear Siror Madam,

                    Havingread your“Volunteers Wanted”advertisement,I Want to apply for working as a volunteer in this internationalsports game.Firstly.I am an English major student,and I have learned.interpretingcourse for two years in my college.。In 2008 BeijingOlympic Games.I have some relative interpreting experience.Secondly,my uncle isa doctor,and he has taught me a lot of first aidmethods.Thirdly.I am warm—hearted and。responsible.

                    I amavailable in the afternoon from Wednesday to Friday.I hope I Canjoin you and make contribution to such anamazing game.

                    Lookingforward to your immediately reply.

                    YoursSincerely,

                    WangLin

                    【寫作點金】

                    該作文屬于應用文文體,是申請者向活動組織者寫的一封電子郵件。首先應該注意文章的格式,其次要注意正文部分的寫作層次:文章的開頭首先要引題,讓收信的人不會感到太唐突,并說明自己寫信的目的,緊接著要針對自己的個人能力與項目的匹配度進行簡短說明,語言要簡單明了,以讓收信人迅速獲取有用信息。最后要說明自己的空余時間,并表達愿意加入這一志

                    愿者行列的強烈愿望,期待得到及時回復。

                    【高頻詞句】

                    applyfor… 申請…

                    beavailable in…在…有空

                    makecontribution to… 為…作貢獻

                    Lookingforward to your immediately reply. 期待您的及時回復!

                    Part B

                    67.【高分范文】

                    Get Ridof Small Advertisements

                    Thecartoon vividly describes the community newspaper board covered with all kindsof small advertisements,which range from house on hire or rent to certificate on falsedocuments.

                    In myopinion,there are two reasons which cause such problem.First,thecommunity’S management system is very weak.Second,not all ofcommunity members regard the community board as an important culture in theirlives.

                    In orderto improve such situation,several measures should be made.Firstly,thecommunity manager should be responsible for checking out.thesurrounding environment。"When seeing such advertisements,he should clean them.Secondly,communitymembers should make efforts to supervise the daily newspaper board and protect

                    theirown special culture.

                    As longas everyone would like to protect their community board,smalladvertisements would decrease gradually. .

                    【寫作點金】

                    這是一篇看圖作文。首先要看懂圖中的內容,用文字簡潔明了地描述圖中所反映的問題;其次,針對問題,分析原因。分析過程中可以結合自己的生活經驗,思考現象背后的深層原因。最后,結合問題和原因提出行之有效的解決方法,需要注意的是原因要內外結合,解決方法要行之有效,符合主題,分點列出,有條理,有說服力。文章結尾部分要突出其成效,表達出解決的效果。

                    【高頻詞句】

                    becovered with…被…所覆蓋

                    rangefrom…to…從…到…

                    think…as…把…看作…

                    checkout檢查

                  大學英語三級試題及答案(14)

                  大學英語三級全真模擬聽力試

                  (_)


                  Test One

                  Part I: Listening Comprehension (15%)

                  Section A

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear 10 short conversations. At the end of each conversation, a question will be asked about whut was said. Both the conversation and the question w ill be spoken only once? After each question there will he a pause. During the pause, you must choose the best answer from the four choices marked A), B). C) and D? Then mark the corresponding letter on the Answer Sheet with a single line through the center

                  Example: You will hear: Where do you think the conversation most provably took place?

                  You will read:

                  A)At the office.

                  B)In the waiting room.

                  C)At the airport.

                  D)In a restaurant.

                  From the conversation we know that the two were talking about some work they had to finish in the evening? This is most likely to have taken place at the(>血匕 Therefore? A) "Af the officeis the best answer. You should choose [A] on the Answer Sheet and mark it with a single line through the center.

                  Sample Answer-{AJ [B] [C] [D]

                  1.A) Fixing an engine?

                  C) Cashing a check?

                  2.A) Visit Japan.

                  C) Travel abroad.

                  3.A) One of a cheaper price?

                  C) One of a fashionable style.

                  4.A) He has changed his plan?

                  C) He is arriving this afternoon?

                  5.A) They had lost their way.

                  C) They were caught in the rain.

                  6.A) They will take the bus at 11 o"clock.

                  B)Thc bus is late.

                  C)The bus has already arrived?

                  D) The woman thought the bus would arrive at 11:20.

                  7.A) The man shouldn"t drink either.

                  B)Drinking is better than smoking.

                  C)The man should switch to drinking?

                  D)The man could smoke a little?

                  8.A) In a bookstore?

                  B)At a museum

                  C)At a zoo.

                  D)On a college campus?

                  9.A) Teacher and student.

                  B)Shop assistant and customer.

                  C)Tourist and travel agent.

                  D)Husband and wife.

                  10.A) She will stop to take a rest.

                  B)She will work for three hours.

                  C)She will have her back checked.

                  D)She will buy a computer in three hours.

                  Section B

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear a short passage. At the end of the passage, you will hear two questions. Both the passage and the questions will he spoken twice. After you hear a question, you must choose the best answer from the four choices marked and D. Then mark the corresponding letter on the Answer Sheet with a single line through the center.

                  Questions 11 to 12 are based on the passage you have just heard.

                  11.A. Tliere are only 23 hours in a day

                  B.There are 8 days in a week

                  C.There are one more hour in a day

                  D.All of the above

                  12.A. Set one hour ahead in each new time zone.

                  B.Set one hour ahead for the whole trip.

                  C.Set one full day back for the whole trip.

                  D.Set 12 hours back.

                  Section C

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear a passage three times? Listen during the first reading. Then listen to carefully the passage again. When it is being read the second time, you should fill in the six blanks numbered farm SI to S6 with the exact words or phrases you have just heard. Finally, when the passage is read for the third time, you should check what you have written.

                  Information has always been at the center of human communication? You may ask why. Well, communication between people involves giving and receiving information. The way we give and receive information today has SI a revolution in the development of the mass

                  media in the 20th century.

                  The first truly mass communication medium was the newspaper. For the first time in history, people could read about S2 in their country and from around the world every day.

                  However, there were two problems with newspapers of that time. S3 ? newspapers

                  were available only in large cities, for getting newspapers to the countryside was a difficult and time-consuming task? Secondly, newspapers weren"t always S4 . as there was a

                  limited range of opinions.

                  Nowadays, we can S5 from a wide variety of sources to get information. Television

                  and the Internet have given us the chance to be informed about everything the S6

                  it happens? Numerous radio and TV stations, satellite channels and millions of websites help people keep up with the latest news. People live history and are part of it.

                  大學英語三級全真模擬聽力試題(二)

                  Test Two

                  Section A

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear 10 short conversations. At the end of each conversation, a question will he asked about what was said. Both the conversation and the question will be spoken only once. After each question there will he a pause. During the pause, you must choose the best answer from the four choices marked A), B). C) and D? Then mark the corresponding letter on the Answer Sheet with a single line through the center.

                  Example: You will hear: Where do you think the conversation most provably took place?

                  You will read:

                  A)At the office.

                  B)In the waiting room.

                  C)At the airport.

                  D)In a restaurant.

                  From the conversation we know that the two were talking about some work they had to finish in the evening? This is most likely to have taken place at the office. Therefore, A) "Af the officeis the best answer You should choose [A] on the Answer Sheet and mark it with a single line through the center.

                  Sample Answer4AJ [B] [C] [D]


                  1.A) Carol.

                  C) Paul.

                  2.A) 11:00.

                  C) 12:00 ?

                  3.A) 5.

                  C) 14.

                  4.A) Go to the post office.

                  C) Cross the street.

                  5.A) Denis.

                  C) Mary.

                  6.A)To get more advice? C)To get married.

                  B)Jim.

                  D)The woman.

                  B)11:30.

                  D)12:30.

                  B)12.

                  D)16.

                  B)Go down the street.

                  D)Go to the cinema.

                  B)John.

                  D)The woman.

                  B)To get more exercise.

                  D)To get a job.


                  7.A) Mr. Johnson will be busy tomorrow morning?

                  B)M匚 Johnson will be busy tomorrow.

                  C).Tomorrow afternoon will be fine.

                  D)The man can meet Mr. Johnson the day after tomorrow.

                  8.A) A dentist.

                  C)Her brother.

                  Section B

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear a short passage. At the end of the passage, you will hear two questions. Both the passage and the questions will be spoken twice. After you hear a question, you must choose the best answer from the four choices marked and D? Then mark the corresponding letter on the Answer Sheet with u single line through the center.

                  Questions 11 to 12 are based on the passage you have just heard.

                  11 ? A) Teachers made children sit still for a long time?

                  B)Children must learn and discover things themselves?

                  C)Children had to repeat things till they could remember them.

                  D) School is like a prison to some children.

                  12. A) They haven"t learnt anything in school.

                  B)Their teachers don"t allow them to work.

                  C)Their parents don"t allow them to work

                  D)The law does not allow them to work.

                  Section C

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear a passage three times? Listen during the first reading? Then listen to carefully the passage again? When it is being read the second time, you should fill in the six blanks numbered farm SI to S6 with the exact words or phrases you have just heard. Finally, when the passage is read for the third time, you should check what you have written.

                  One way to think about time is to imagine a world without time? There could be no movement, because time and movement cannot be SI . A world without time could exist only as

                  long as there were no changes? For time and change are linked? We know that time has passed when something changes?

                  In the real world - the world with time changes never stop. Some changes happen only once in a S2 ; others happen repeatedly. Humans always have noted S3

                  events that repeat themselves? When people began to count such events, they began to measure time.

                  In early human history, the only changes that seemed to repeat themselves evenly were the movements of S4 in the sky. The most easily seen result of these movements was

                  the difference between light and darkness?

                  The sun rises in the eastern sky, S5 light. It moves across the sky and sinks in

                  the west, causing darkness? The appearance and disappearance of the sun was even and unfailing. The periods of light and darkness it created were the first S6 periods of time. We

                  have named each period of light and darkness - one day.

                  Test Three

                  Section A

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear 10 short conversations. At the end of each conversation,

                  Example:

                  a question will be asked about what was said. Both the conversation and the question w ill be spoken only once? After each question there will he a pause. During the pause, you must choose the best answer from the four choices murked A 丿,B). C) and D? Then mark the corresponding letter on the Answer Sheet with a single line through the center.

                  You will hear: Where do you think the conversation most provably took place?

                  You will read:

                  D)She always goes to work on foot.

                  8.A) In a barbershop?

                  B)In a supermarket.

                  C)In a bank.

                  D)In a restaurant.

                  9.A) Husband and wife.

                  B)Doctor and patient.

                  C)Neighbors.

                  D)Employer and employee?

                  10.A) She planted trees.

                  B)She saw the panda.

                  C)She taught her roommates how to play Chinese chess?

                  D)She learned to play Chinese chess?

                  Section B

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear a short passage. At the encl of the passage, you will hear two questions. Both the passage and the questions will he spoken twice. After you hear a question, you must choose the best answer from the four choices marked and D? Then mark the conesponding letter on the Answer Sheet with u single line through the center.

                  Questions 11 to 12 are based on the passage you have just heard.

                  11.A) You must tell your new friend your telephone number at your first meeting?

                  B)You shouldn"t talk about business on your first meeting with your new friend.

                  C)It"s quite common to give information about your family or your work.

                  D)You doift have the right to end the conversation.

                  12.A) How to make new friends

                  B)The three parts of the first conversation with a new friend.

                  C)The importance of talking with a stranger in English

                  D)How to maintain friendship

                  Section C

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear a passage three times? Listen during the first reading. Then listen to carefully the passage again? When it is being read the second time, you should fill in the six blanks numbered form SI to S6 with the exact w ords or phrases you have just heard. Finally, when the passage is read for the third time, you should check what you have written.

                  Dreams are expressions of thoughts, feelings and events that pass through our mind while we are sleeping. People dream about one to two hours each night. We may have four to seven dreams in one night. Everybody dreams. But only some people SI their dreams.

                  The word ”drcam” comes from an old word in English that means HS2 M and

                  ”music.” Our dreams often include all the senses 一 smells, sounds, S3 , tastes and

                  things we touch. We dream in S4 . Sometimes we dream the same dream over and

                  over again. These repeated dreams are often unpleasant. They may even be nightmares - bad dreams that S5 us.

                  Artists, writers and scientists sometimes say they get ideas from dreams? For example, the singer Paul McCartney of the Beatles said he awakened one day with the music for the song "Yesterday11 in his head? Tlie writer Mary Shelley said she had a very strong dream about a scientist using a machine to make a S6 come alive? When she awakened, she began

                  to write her book about a scientist named Frankenstein who creates a frightening monster.



                  Test Four

                  Section A

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear 10 short conversations. At the end of each conversation, a question will he asked about what was said. Both the conversation and the question will be spoken only once? After each question there will be a pause. During the pause, you must choose the best answer from the four choices marked A 丿,B丿,C) and D.. Then mark the corresponding letter on the Answer Sheet with u single line through the center.

                  Example: You will hear: Where do you think the conversation most provably took place?

                  You will read:

                  A)At the office?

                  B)In the waiting room.

                  C)At the airport.

                  D)In a restaurant.

                  From the conversation we know that the h\ o were talking about some work they had to finish in the evening. This is most likely to have taken place at the office. Therefore, A) "At the officeis the best answer. You should choose [AJ on the Answer Sheet and mark it with a single line through the center

                  Sample Answer*#} [B] [C] [D]

                  B)Leave the house?

                  D)Finish his computer program.

                  2.A) Ping Pong balls.

                  C)Basketballs.

                  3.A) Eating out.

                  C)Changing clothes.

                  4.A) She wants to have a break.

                  C)She wants to leave on time?

                  5.A) He couldn"t see the performance clearly.

                  C)He found the clock didn"t tell the right time.

                  6.A) $47.

                  C)$26.

                  7.A) Teacher and student.

                  C)Mother and son.

                  8.A) She is seldom absent.

                  C) She misses her school days?

                  9.A) It"s warm.

                  C) It"s sunny.

                  10.A) It"s usually hard to borrow David"s car.

                  B)David is often willing to lend money to others.

                  C)David is willing to lend anything except his car to others?

                  D)When someone borrows David"s car. they should pay him?

                  Section B

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear a short passage. At the end of the passage, you will hear two questions. Both the passage and the questions will he spoken twice. After you hear a question, you must choose the best answer from the four choices marked and D? Then mark the corresponding letter on the Answer Sheet with u single line through the center.

                  Questions 11 to 12 are based on the passage you have just heard.

                  11 ? A) She didn"t have enough money.

                  B)She wanted to thank the doctor.

                  C)She thought that a purse was a better present than money.

                  D)Her son asked her to do that.

                  12. A) 5 pounds?

                  B)50 pounds?

                  C)250 pounds?

                  D)500 pounds?

                  Section C

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear a passage three times? Listen during the first reading? Then listen to carefully the passage again. When it is being read the second time, you should fill in the six blanks numbered form SJ to S6 with the exact x^orcls or phrases you have just heard. Finally, when the passage is read for the third time, you should check what you have written.

                  What would happen if you were the only person left who spoke your language? Who would you share stories with, sing songs to, or SI jokes with? Who would understand

                  your names for local plants, animals and traditions? This is the example David Harrison and Gregory Anderson use to explain the situation of many people around the world whose local languages are disappearing IVI匚 Harrison and Mr. Anderson head Living longues, an organization that studies and S2 endangered languages?

                  Sometimes a language disappears S3 when the last person speaking it dies? Or,

                  a local language might disappear more slowly. This happens when an official language is used more often and children stop learning the local language of their parents? This is not a new S4 . Official languages often represent a form of control over a group of people?

                  Throughout history, the language spoken by a powerful group S5 across a

                  civilization. The more powerful culture S6 respects the language and culture of

                  smaller ethnic groups? So, smaller cultures lose their local language as the language of the culture in power becomes the stronger influence?

                  Test Five

                  Section A

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear 10 short conversations. At the end of each conversation, a question will he asked about what was said. Both the conversation and the question will be spoken only once? After each question there will be a pause. During the pause, you must choose the best answer from the four choices marked A), B), C) and D? Then mark the corresponding letter on the Answer Sheet with a single line through the center

                  Example: You will hear: Where do you think the conversation most provably took place?

                  You will read:

                  A)At the office?

                  B)In the waiting room.

                  C)At the airport.

                  D)In a restaurant.

                  From the conversation we know that the two were talking about some work they had to finish in the evening? This is most likely to have taken place at the offic匕 Therefore, A) HAt the officeis the best an^en You should choose [A] on the Answer Sheet and mark it with u single line through the center.

                  Sample Answer4A) [B] [C] [D]

                  1.A) 15. B)25?

                  C)35? D)45?

                  2.A) The man can handle the task by himself.

                  B)The woman reminds the man not to forget to ask Linda?

                  C)Linda will probably refuse to help the man.

                  D)The woman is quite willing to help the man.

                  3.A) On a train. B) On a bus.

                  C) On a plane. D) In a car.

                  Section B

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear a short passage. At the end of the passage, you will hear two questions. Both the passage and the questions will he spoken twice. After you hear a question, you must choose the best answer from the four choices marked

                  A)tB),C) and D? Then murk the corresponding letter on the Answer Sheet with u single line through the center.

                  Questions 11 to 12 are based on the passage you have just heard.

                  11.A) People only care about their own business

                  B)People are always ready to help each other

                  C)People live in very small areas

                  D)People give help to others in order to get something in return.

                  12.A) Life in cities and life in villages in the same country are almost the same.

                  B)There are not many people in the streets in the center of London on Sundays.

                  C)In large cities people seldom know what their neighbors have for lunch?

                  D)In an English village everybody knows everybody else?

                  Section C

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear a passage three times. Listen during the first reading.

                  Then listen to carefully the passage again. When it is being read the second time, you should fill in the six blanks numbered form SJ to S6 with the exact words or phrases you have just heard. Finally, when the passage is read for the third time, you should check what you have written.

                  ?r

                  An estimated nine million people rock climb in the United States. Millions more take part in the activity around the world. Some do it just for SI satisfaction. Others

                  S2 ? Rock climbing can be dangerous. But there are many methods and protective

                  devices that can increase a climbefs safety.

                  Climbing takes strength? control and good S3 ? Climbers have to pull themselves

                  S4 up the face of very high rocks or walls? So they have to be strong enough to

                  carry their own weight. And climbers sometimes have to hold on to rocks by only their fingers or toes.

                  There are several kinds of rock climbing? Traditional rock climbing is done outside? Climbers wear ropes and attach devices to the rocks as they climb many hundreds of meters up. They also connect their ropes to the devices? If a climber slips, a rope can stop him from S5 ?

                  Sport climbing is similar. However, in those cases the protective devices are permanently placed in the rock? There is also S6 climbing? Rock walls made of wood or concrete have

                  places for the climbefs hands and feet.

                  答案:

                  BDBAC BACDA DA experienced events Firstly reliable choose minute

                  CADAC BBADD BD separated while natural objects producing accepted

                  BCABA ACDAC CB remember joy sights color frighten creature

                  ABADB CCABA BC exchange protects immediately process spreads rarely

                  ACCBD AABCD BA personal compete balance straight falling indoor

                  大學英語三級試題及答案(15)

                  大學英語三級全真模擬聽力試題(一)

                  Test One

                  Part I: Listening Comprehension (15%)

                  Section A

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear 10 short conversations. At the end of each conversation, a question will be asked about what was said. Both the conversation and the question will be spoken only once. After each question there will be a pause. During the pause, you must choose the best answer from the four choices marked A), B), C) and D. Then mark the corresponding letter on the Answer Sheet with a single line through the center.

                  Example: You will hear: Where do you think the conversation most provably took place?

                  You will read:

                  A) At the office.

                  B) In the waiting room.

                  C) At the airport.

                  D) In a restaurant.

                  From the conversation we know that the two were talking about some work they had to finish in the evening. This is most likely to have taken place at the office. Therefore, A) “At the office” is the best answer. You should choose [A] on the Answer Sheet and mark it with a single line through the center.

                  Sample Answer [A] [B] [C] [D]

                  1. A) Fixing an engine. B) Repairing a car.

                  C) Cashing a check. D) Buying some wheels.

                  2. A) Visit Japan. B) Cook some food.

                  C) Travel abroad. D) Eat out.

                  3. A) One of a cheaper price. B) One of a different color.

                  C) One of a fashionable style. D) One of a smaller size.

                  4. A) He has changed his plan. B) He has canceled his trip.

                  C) He is arriving this afternoon. D) He forgot to arrange his trip.

                  5. A) They had lost their way. B) They were told it would rain.

                  C) They were caught in the rain. D) They had taken an umbrella.

                  6. A) They will take the bus at 11 o’clock.

                  B) The bus is late.

                  C) The bus has already arrived.

                  D) The woman thought the bus would arrive at 11:20.

                  7. A) The man shouldn’t drink either.

                  B) Drinking is better than smoking.

                  C) The man should switch to drinking.

                  D) The man could smoke a little.

                  8. A) In a bookstore.

                  B) At a museum

                  C) At a zoo.

                  D) On a college campus.

                  9. A) Teacher and student.

                  B) Shop assistant and customer.

                  C) Tourist and travel agent.

                  D) Husband and wife.

                  10. A) She will stop to take a rest.

                  B) She will work for three hours.

                  C) She will have her back checked.

                  D) She will buy a computer in three hours.

                  Section B

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear a short passage. At the end of the passage, you will hear two questions. Both the passage and the questions will be spoken twice. After you hear a question, you must choose the best answer from the four choices marked A),B),C) and D. Then mark the corresponding letter on the Answer Sheet with a single line through the center.

                  Questions 11 to 12 are based on the passage you have just heard.

                  11. A. There are only 23 hours in a day

                  B. There are 8 days in a week

                  C. There are one more hour in a day

                  D. All of the above

                  12. A. Set one hour ahead in each new time zone.

                  B. Set one hour ahead for the whole trip.

                  C. Set one full day back for the whole trip.

                  D. Set 12 hours back.

                  Section C

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear a passage three times. Listen during the first reading. Then listen to carefully the passage again. When it is being read the second time, you should fill in the six blanks numbered form S1 to S6 with the exact words or phrases you have just heard. Finally, when the passage is read for the third time, you should check what you have written.

                  Information has always been at the center of human communication. You may ask why. Well, communication between people involves giving and receiving information. The way we give and receive information today has S1____________ a revolution in the development of the mass media in the 20th century.

                  The first truly mass communication medium was the newspaper. For the first time in history, people could read about S2____________ in their country and from around the world every day. However, there were two problems with newspapers of that time. S3____________, newspapers were available only in large cities, for getting newspapers to the countryside was a difficult and time-consuming task. Secondly, newspapers weren"t always S4____________, as there was a limited range of opinions.

                  Nowadays, we can S5____________ from a wide variety of sources to get information. Television and the Internet have given us the chance to be informed about everything the S6_____________ it happens. Numerous radio and TV stations, satellite channels and millions of websites help people keep up with the latest news. People live history and are part of it.

                  大學英語三級全真模擬聽力試題(二)

                  Test Two

                  Section A

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear 10 short conversations. At the end of each conversation, a question will be asked about what was said. Both the conversation and the question will be spoken only once. After each question there will be a pause. During the pause, you must choose the best answer from the four choices marked A), B), C) and D. Then mark the corresponding letter on the Answer Sheet with a single line through the center.

                  Example: You will hear: Where do you think the conversation most provably took place?

                  You will read:

                  A) At the office.

                  B) In the waiting room.

                  C) At the airport.

                  D) In a restaurant.

                  From the conversation we know that the two were talking about some work they had to finish in the evening. This is most likely to have taken place at the office. Therefore, A) “At the office” is the best answer. You should choose [A] on the Answer Sheet and mark it with a single line through the center.

                  Sample Answer [A] [B] [C] [D]

                  1. A) Carol. B) Jim.

                  C) Paul. D) The woman.

                  2. A) 11:00. B) 11:30.

                  C) 12:00. D) 12:30.

                  3. A) 5. B) 12.

                  C) 14. D) 16.

                  4. A) Go to the post office. B) Go down the street.

                  C) Cross the street. D) Go to the cinema.

                  5. A) Denis. B) John.

                  C) Mary. D) The woman.

                  6. A)To get more advice. B)To get more exercise.

                  C)To get married. D)To get a job.

                  7. A) Mr. Johnson will be busy tomorrow morning.

                  B) Mr. Johnson will be busy tomorrow.

                  C).Tomorrow afternoon will be fine.

                  D) The man can meet Mr. Johnson the day after tomorrow.

                  8. A) A dentist. B) Her teacher.

                  C) Her brother. D) Her friends.

                  9. A) He’s a receptionist. B) He’s a tour guide.

                  C) He’s a shopkeeper. D) He’s an accountant.

                  10. A) At a theater. B) In a waiting room.

                  C) In a supermarket. D) In a restaurant.

                  Section B

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear a short passage. At the end of the passage, you will hear two questions. Both the passage and the questions will be spoken twice. After you hear a question, you must choose the best answer from the four choices marked A),B),C) and D. Then mark the corresponding letter on the Answer Sheet with a single line through the center.

                  Questions 11 to 12 are based on the passage you have just heard.

                  11. A) Teachers made children sit still for a long time.

                  B) Children must learn and discover things themselves.

                  C) Children had to repeat things till they could remember them.

                  D) School is like a prison to some children.

                  12. A) They haven’t learnt anything in school.

                  B) Their teachers don’t allow them to work.

                  C) Their parents don’t allow them to work

                  D) The law does not allow them to work.

                  Section C

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear a passage three times. Listen during the first reading. Then listen to carefully the passage again. When it is being read the second time, you should fill in the six blanks numbered form S1 to S6 with the exact words or phrases you have just heard. Finally, when the passage is read for the third time, you should check what you have written.

                  One way to think about time is to imagine a world without time. There could be no movement, because time and movement cannot be S1____________. A world without time could exist only as long as there were no changes. For time and change are linked. We know that time has passed when something changes.

                  In the real world -- the world with time -- changes never stop. Some changes happen only once in a S2____________; others happen repeatedly. Humans always have noted S3____________ events that repeat themselves. When people began to count such events, they began to measure time.

                  In early human history, the only changes that seemed to repeat themselves evenly were the movements of S4____________ in the sky. The most easily seen result of these movements was the difference between light and darkness.

                  The sun rises in the eastern sky, S5____________ light. It moves across the sky and sinks in the west, causing darkness. The appearance and disappearance of the sun was even and unfailing. The periods of light and darkness it created were the first S6____________ periods of time. We have named each period of light and darkness -- one day.

                  大學英語三級全真模擬聽力試題(三)

                  Test Three

                  Section A

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear 10 short conversations. At the end of each conversation, a question will be asked about what was said. Both the conversation and the question will be spoken only once. After each question there will be a pause. During the pause, you must choose the best answer from the four choices marked A), B), C) and D. Then mark the corresponding letter on the Answer Sheet with a single line through the center.

                  Example: You will hear: Where do you think the conversation most provably took place?

                  You will read:

                  A) At the office.

                  B) In the waiting room.

                  C) At the airport.

                  D) In a restaurant.

                  From the conversation we know that the two were talking about some work they had to finish in the evening. This is most likely to have taken place at the office. Therefore, A) “At the office” is the best answer. You should choose [A] on the Answer Sheet and mark it with a single line through the center.

                  Sample Answer [A] [B] [C] [D]

                  1. A) A policewoman.

                  B) A hotel clerk.

                  C) A waitperson.

                  D) A shop assistant.

                  2. A) The lady bought the desk lamp when she was in Hong Kong.

                  B) The lady bought the desk lamp in China last winter.

                  C) The lady’s friend got it on the Internet for her.

                  D) The lady’s friend bought it in China.

                  3. A) He didn’t attend the lecture.

                  B) He fell asleep on the train.

                  C) He caught the early train to attend the lecture.

                  D) The train broke down and he was late for the lecture.

                  4. A) 08:00.

                  B) 08:15.

                  C) 08:30.

                  D) 08:50.

                  5. A) His car key.

                  B) His overcoat

                  C) The sofa.

                  D) The table.

                  6. A) The man can’t swim.

                  B) The man can swim after he has done his homework.

                  C) The man can’t swim because he doesn’t know the way.

                  D) The man can swim if he knows the way.

                  7. A) She does not work on rainy days.

                  B) She goes to work by bicycle every day.

                  C) She walks to work on rainy days.

                  D) She always goes to work on foot.

                  8. A) In a barbershop.

                  B) In a supermarket.

                  C) In a bank.

                  D) In a restaurant.

                  9. A) Husband and wife.

                  B) Doctor and patient.

                  C) Neighbors.

                  D) Employer and employee.

                  10. A) She planted trees.

                  B) She saw the panda.

                  C) She taught her roommates how to play Chinese chess.

                  D) She learned to play Chinese chess.

                  Section B

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear a short passage. At the end of the passage, you will hear two questions. Both the passage and the questions will be spoken twice. After you hear a question, you must choose the best answer from the four choices marked A),B),C) and D. Then mark the corresponding letter on the Answer Sheet with a single line through the center.

                  Questions 11 to 12 are based on the passage you have just heard.

                  11. A) You must tell your new friend your telephone number at your first meeting.

                  B) You shouldn’t talk about business on your first meeting with your new friend.

                  C) It’s quite common to give information about your family or your work.

                  D)You don’t have the right to end the conversation.

                  12. A) How to make new friends

                  B) The three parts of the first conversation with a new friend.

                  C) The importance of talking with a stranger in English

                  D)How to maintain friendship

                  Section C

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear a passage three times. Listen during the first reading. Then listen to carefully the passage again. When it is being read the second time, you should fill in the six blanks numbered form S1 to S6 with the exact words or phrases you have just heard. Finally, when the passage is read for the third time, you should check what you have written.

                  Dreams are expressions of thoughts, feelings and events that pass through our mind while we are sleeping. People dream about one to two hours each night. We may have four to seven dreams in one night. Everybody dreams. But only some people S1____________ their dreams.

                  The word "dream" comes from an old word in English that means "S2____________" and "music." Our dreams often include all the senses – smells, sounds, S3____________ , tastes and things we touch. We dream in S4____________. Sometimes we dream the same dream over and over again. These repeated dreams are often unpleasant. They may even be nightmares -- bad dreams that S5____________ us.

                  Artists, writers and scientists sometimes say they get ideas from dreams. For example, the singer Paul McCartney of the Beatles said he awakened one day with the music for the song "Yesterday" in his head. The writer Mary Shelley said she had a very strong dream about a scientist using a machine to make a S6____________ come alive. When she awakened, she began to write her book about a scientist named Frankenstein who creates a frightening monster.

                  大學英語三級全真模擬聽力試題(四)

                  Test Four

                  Section A

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear 10 short conversations. At the end of each conversation, a question will be asked about what was said. Both the conversation and the question will be spoken only once. After each question there will be a pause. During the pause, you must choose the best answer from the four choices marked A), B), C) and D.. Then mark the corresponding letter on the Answer Sheet with a single line through the center.

                  Example: You will hear: Where do you think the conversation most provably took place?

                  You will read:

                  A) At the office.

                  B) In the waiting room.

                  C) At the airport.

                  D) In a restaurant.

                  From the conversation we know that the two were talking about some work they had to finish in the evening. This is most likely to have taken place at the office. Therefore, A) “At the office” is the best answer. You should choose [A] on the Answer Sheet and mark it with a single line through the center.

                  Sample Answer [A] [B] [C] [D]

                  1. A) Turn the PC off. B) Leave the house.

                  C) Play badminton. D) Finish his computer program.

                  2. A) Ping Pong balls. B) Golf balls.

                  C) Basketballs. D) Footballs.

                  3. A) Eating out. B) Buying birthday presents.

                  C) Changing clothes. D) Having a rest.

                  4. A) She wants to have a break. B) She wants to take some time off.

                  C) She wants to leave on time. D) She wants to continue.

                  5. A) He couldn’t see the performance clearly. B) He thought the performance was dull.

                  C) He found the clock didn’t tell the right time. D) He didn’t arrive in time for the

                  performance.

                  6. A) $47. B) $37.

                  C) $26. D) $11.

                  7. A) Teacher and student. B) Doctor and patient.

                  C) Mother and son. D) Husband and wife.

                  8. A) She is seldom absent. B) She is regularly absent.

                  C) She misses her school days. D) She doesn’t like school at all.

                  9. A) It’s warm. B) It’s cold.

                  C) It’s sunny. D) It’s cloudy.

                  10. A) It’s usually hard to borrow David’s car.

                  B) David is often willing to lend money to others.

                  C) David is willing to lend anything except his car to others.

                  D) When someone borrows David’s car, they should pay him.

                  Section B

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear a short passage. At the end of the passage, you will hear two questions. Both the passage and the questions will be spoken twice. After you hear a question, you must choose the best answer from the four choices marked A),B),C) and D. Then mark the corresponding letter on the Answer Sheet with a single line through the center.

                  Questions 11 to 12 are based on the passage you have just heard.

                  11. A) She didn’t have enough money.

                  B) She wanted to thank the doctor.

                  C) She thought that a purse was a better present than money.

                  D) Her son asked her to do that.

                  12. A) 5 pounds.

                  B) 50 pounds.

                  C) 250 pounds.

                  D) 500 pounds.

                  Section C

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear a passage three times. Listen during the first reading. Then listen to carefully the passage again. When it is being read the second time, you should fill in the six blanks numbered form S1 to S6 with the exact words or phrases you have just heard. Finally, when the passage is read for the third time, you should check what you have written.

                  What would happen if you were the only person left who spoke your language? Who would you share stories with, sing songs to, or S1____________ jokes with? Who would understand your names for local plants, animals and traditions? This is the example David Harrison and Gregory Anderson use to explain the situation of many people around the world whose local languages are disappearing Mr. Harrison and Mr. Anderson head Living Tongues, an organization that studies and S2____________ endangered languages.

                  Sometimes a language disappears S3____________ when the last person speaking it dies. Or, a local language might disappear more slowly. This happens when an official language is used more often and children stop learning the local language of their parents. This is not a new S4____________. Official languages often represent a form of control over a group of people.

                  Throughout history, the language spoken by a powerful group S5____________ across a civilization. The more powerful culture S6____________ respects the language and culture of smaller ethnic groups. So, smaller cultures lose their local language as the language of the culture in power becomes the stronger influence.

                  大學英語三級全真模擬聽力試題(五)

                  Test Five

                  Section A

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear 10 short conversations. At the end of each conversation, a question will be asked about what was said. Both the conversation and the question will be spoken only once. After each question there will be a pause. During the pause, you must choose the best answer from the four choices marked A), B), C) and D. Then mark the corresponding letter on the Answer Sheet with a single line through the center.

                  Example: You will hear: Where do you think the conversation most provably took place?

                  You will read:

                  A) At the office.

                  B) In the waiting room.

                  C) At the airport.

                  D) In a restaurant.

                  From the conversation we know that the two were talking about some work they had to finish in the evening. This is most likely to have taken place at the office. Therefore, A) “At the office” is the best answer. You should choose [A] on the Answer Sheet and mark it with a single line through the center.

                  Sample Answer [A] [B] [C] [D]

                  1. A) 15. B) 25.

                  C) 35. D) 45.

                  2. A) The man can handle the task by himself.

                  B) The woman reminds the man not to forget to ask Linda.

                  C) Linda will probably refuse to help the man.

                  D) The woman is quite willing to help the man.

                  3. A) On a train. B) On a bus.

                  C) On a plane. D) In a car.

                  4. A) It was a short but very good speech. B) It was a long but humorous speech.

                  C) It was too short. D) It was too long.

                  5. A) His biscuits. B) His desk.

                  C) The drawer. D) His pen.

                  6. A) Monday. B) Tuesday.

                  C) Wednesday. D) Thursday.

                  7. A) Flower. B) Water.

                  C) Sugar. D) Butter.

                  8 A) The man’s lawyer. B) The man’s wife.

                  C) The man’s teacher. D) The man’s boss.

                  9. A) She did not have enough money for the trip. B) She did not have enough time for the trip

                  C) She did not enjoy the trip. D) She hopes to take another trip soon.

                  10. A) Employer and employee. B) Mother and son.

                  C) Friends. D) Teacher and student.

                  Section B

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear a short passage. At the end of the passage, you will hear two questions. Both the passage and the questions will be spoken twice. After you hear a question, you must choose the best answer from the four choices marked A),B),C) and D. Then mark the corresponding letter on the Answer Sheet with a single line through the center.

                  Questions 11 to 12 are based on the passage you have just heard.

                  11. A) People only care about their own business

                  B) People are always ready to help each other

                  C) People live in very small areas

                  D) People give help to others in order to get something in return.

                  12. A) Life in cities and life in villages in the same country are almost the same.

                  B) There are not many people in the streets in the center of London on Sundays.

                  C) In large cities people seldom know what their neighbors have for lunch.

                  D)In an English village everybody knows everybody else.

                  Section C

                  Directions: In this section, you will hear a passage three times. Listen during the first reading. Then listen to carefully the passage again. When it is being read the second time, you should fill in the six blanks numbered form S1 to S6 with the exact words or phrases you have just heard. Finally, when the passage is read for the third time, you should check what you have written.

                  An estimated nine million people rock climb in the United States. Millions more take part in the activity around the world. Some do it just for S1____________satisfaction. Others S2____________. Rock climbing can be dangerous. But there are many methods and protective devices that can increase a climber"s safety.

                  Climbing takes strength, control and good S3____________. Climbers have to pull themselves S4____________ up the face of very high rocks or walls. So they have to be strong enough to carry their own weight. And climbers sometimes have to hold on to rocks by only their fingers or toes.

                  There are several kinds of rock climbing. Traditional rock climbing is done outside. Climbers wear ropes and attach devices to the rocks as they climb many hundreds of meters up. They also connect their ropes to the devices. If a climber slips, a rope can stop him from S5____________.

                  Sport climbing is similar. However, in those cases the protective devices are permanently placed in the rock. There is also S6____________ climbing. Rock walls made of wood or concrete have places for the climber"s hands and feet.

                  答案:

                  BDBAC BACDA DA experienced events Firstly reliable choose minute

                  CADAC BBADD BD separated while natural objects producing accepted

                  BCABA ACDAC CB remember joy sights color frighten creature

                  ABADB CCABA BC exchange protects immediately process spreads rarely

                  ACCBD AABCD BA personal compete balance straight falling indoor

                  7.3.4.2 故障代碼

                  故障的代碼、產生原因及修正方法見下表。灰影部分是A故障。對于表中以黑底白字標明的故障,可在應用中編

                  輯對此類故障的響應方式。見變頻器保護參數組。

                  注意:當聯系工廠或供應商描述故障時,有必要寫明面

                  故障代碼

                  故障

                  可能的原因

                  檢查措施

                  1

                  過電流

                  變頻器檢測到電機輸出有過大電流(>4*In):

                  ? 突加重負載

                  ? 電機電纜短路

                  ? 電機不合適

                  檢查負載

                  檢查電機規格

                  檢查電纜

                  2

                  過電壓

                  直流橋電壓超過表4-2 中規定的極限。

                  ? 減速時間太短

                  ? 設備受到很高的過壓峰值影響

                  調整減速時間為更大,使用制動斬波器或制動電阻

                  (作為選件選用)

                  3

                  接地故障

                  電流檢測發現電機相電流之和不為0

                  ? 電機或電纜絕緣失效

                  檢查電機和電纜

                  5

                  充電開關

                  當START 指令起作用時充電開關開路

                  ? 故障操作

                  ? 器件失效

                  復位并重新起動。

                  如果故障重新出現,請與你的Vacon 代理商聯系。

                  6

                  緊急停車

                  停車信號從選件板給出

                  7

                  飽和跳閘

                  多種原因造成,

                  —元件失效

                  —制動電阻短路或過載

                  不能從面板復位。

                  關閉電源。

                  不要再次上電。

                  與工廠聯系。

                  如果此故障與F1 同時出現,檢查電機及電機電纜

                  8

                  系統故障

                  — 器件失效

                  — 故障操作

                  注意異常故障數據記錄,見章節7.3.4.3

                  復位并重新起動。

                  如果故障重新出現,請與你的Vacon 代理商聯系。

                  9

                  欠電壓

                  直流橋電壓低于表4-2 規定的極限值。

                  若為暫時的電源電壓中斷,可復位后重新起動。檢查

                  熱門標簽:
                  《大學英語三級試題及答案15篇.doc》
                  將本文的Word文檔下載到電腦,方便收藏和打印
                  推薦度:

                  文檔為doc格式

                  文章下載

                  《大學英語三級試題及答案15篇.doc》

                  VIP請直接點擊按鈕下載本文的Word文檔下載到電腦,請使用最新版的WORD和WPS軟件打開,如發現文檔不全可以聯系客服申請處理。

                  文檔下載
                  VIP免費下載文檔
                  <ruby id="zx91x"></ruby><p id="zx91x"></p>
                  <p id="zx91x"></p>
                  <pre id="zx91x"><ruby id="zx91x"><mark id="zx91x"></mark></ruby></pre>
                  
                  
                  <p id="zx91x"><del id="zx91x"></del></p>

                        <track id="zx91x"><ruby id="zx91x"></ruby></track>

                            <pre id="zx91x"><ruby id="zx91x"></ruby></pre>

                            <track id="zx91x"><del id="zx91x"></del></track>

                              <big id="zx91x"><ruby id="zx91x"></ruby></big>

                                  成人视频